w 

m 




MM 



Kffi 



*jm*m 




I 



s^. 




^ -*^>-?*-^ **-£^Cn_- J-nrfav y/\*is)^_ 




L c j A/\ <a \r y A n J 



THE 



YOUNG STUDENT'S COMPANION, 



ELEMENTARY LESSONS AND EXERCISES IN TRANSLATING 



ENGLISH INTO FRENCH 



REVISED AND ENLARGED. 



PHILADELPHIA: 
ELDREDGE & BROTHER, 

17 & 19 SOUTH SIXTH STREET. 

NEW YORK : J. W. SCnERMERHORN k CO. BOSTON I WOODMAN k HAMMETT. 

CINCINNATI : R. W. CARROLL k CO. CLEVELAND : 

INGHAM k BRAGG. 

18 69. 






0^ 

6 



• 



V 



Entered according to act of Congress, in the year 1853, by 
SMITH AND ENGLISH, 

n the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States, in and for 
the Eastern District of Pennsylvania. 



48 65 55 

JUL 1 6 1942 




CAXTON PRESS OF 
IHERMAH & CO., PUILADELPIIIA, 



RECOMMENDATIONS. 



Having examined attentively a little book called The Young Student's 
Companion, I take pleasure in recommending it to the attention of those who 
wish to acquire a thorough knowledge of the French language. They will 
find in it much information, especially in acquiring a correct use of the arti- 
cles, pronouns, &c, which present always great difficulties, and require much 
time and trouble in finding their real application in more elaborate works and 
large grammars. 

PETER FRENAYE, 
Professor of the French Language. 
Philadelphia, May 19, 1851. 



The undersigned has used for several years The Young Student's Companion, 
in several schools, and with a great number of scholars. He has found every 
part of it to be perfectly clear and intelligible to all his scholars. He also 
considers the work as complete and as well calculated to give to the students 
a correct knowledge and practical use of the main parts of the French Gram- 
mar, as could be given within the limits assigned to it. 

He therefore feels no hesitation in recommending it to the public as the 
most useful elementary work of its kind ever published in this country. 

B. GARDEL. 
Philadelphia, May 20th, 1858. 



I consider " The Young Student's Companion," as the easiest possible in- 
troduction to the study of the French ; I have used this simple and amiable 
little friend, with the greatest benefit to my young pupils. 

PROF. F. DROUIN. 
Philadelphia, June 9th, 1851, 



KECOMMENDATIONS. 



My opinion having been requested upon the Young Student's Companion, 
I take willingly this opportunity to recommend it as one of the best elemen 
tary books ; because it contains in a very small size all that is necessary to 
beginners, and that can be found in the voluminous French Grammars. It 
is a judicious choice of all the elements of such a language ; a clear and easy 
summary of its most important rules, made with order, shortness and skill, so 
as to instruct, not confound and tire the pupils. I have used and still use it 
in large classes, and it appears to me very fit and useful to learners of the 
French, particularly of this age, who like to be acquainted with it in a short 
time, and to receive few precepts and much practice. ) 

V. DAAMARELLI, 
Professor in the University of Pennsylvania 
Philadelphia, November 16, 1852. 



From the moment I met with the Young Student's Companion and 
perused it, I preferred it to any other work of the kind. I consider the 
method employed in it the most useful to impart the first and most necessary 
principles of the French language. 

J. MAROTEAU. 
Philadelphia, January, 1853. 



The clear and systematic arrangement of the " Young Student's Companion/' 
judiciously divided between Grammar and Exercises, will make and keep it an 
ever welcome guide for both students and teachers. 

A. SIMON, 
Professor of the French Language. 
Philadelphia, May, 1867. 



PREFACE. 



The object of this little book is to present to the young 
student a condensed view of the elements of the French lan- 
guage, in a clear and simple manner, and, at the same time, 
to lessen the fatigue incurred by the teacher in giving re- 
peated verbal explanations of the most important rules of 
etymology. No attempt has been made to teach the syntax 
of the language, with the exception of a few fundamental 
rules, neither have many idioms been introduced ; the aim pf 
the compiler being to avoid whatever might perplex or con- 
fuse. This little work, it will be remembered, is not in- 
tended to take the place of a Grammar, but to prepare 
the pupil, by careful drilling, for larger and more com- 
prehensive treatises ; and it is believed that any child, 
who can distinguish the different parts of speech in En- 
glish, will be able to understand and learn the lessons 
without difficulty ; and that, if they are thoroughly learned, 
the succeeding course of French study will be much facili- 
tated. 

The multiplication of school books may be considered 
an evil, but the compiler :ould not find any work containing 

1* 



VI PREFACE. 



a clear, comprehensive view of the parts of speech and their 
modifications, and at the same time sufficiently elementary 
to be placed in the hands of pupils beginning to translate 
from English into French. She has, therefore, prepared this 
little volume, and, after teaching classes from it for several 
years, and testing its adaptation to the comprehension of pu- 
pils of various ages and capacities, she ventures to offer it 
to the public, in the hope that it may prove a useful auxiliary 
to other teachers. In its preparation the best authorities 
have been carefully consulted and followed, and assistance 
has been kindly furnished by several Professors of the French 
language, whose experience in teaching enables them to 

judge of the wants of the young student. 

M. A. L. 

Philadelphia, 1853. 



TO TEACHEES. 

The lessons preceding the exercises are designed to be com- 
mitted to memory by the pupil. He will find it advantageous to 
commit to memory the vocabularies also, as they occur. 

It is not sufficient that the pupil merely write these exercises 
to be examined by the teacher ; he should also be required to 
give his reasons for using one form of the article, adjective, &c, 
in preference to another. 



(7) 



ELEMENTARY FRENCH EXERCISES. 



CHAPTER I. 

ON THE ARTICLE. 

SECT. I. THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 

The, le, la, V , les. 

Of the, du, de la, de V , des. 

To the, ail,, a la, a V , aux 

From the, dit } de la, de V ', des. 

§ 1. The definite article the is expressed in French by 

fe, before a noun of the masculine gender, singular 
number, beginning with a consonant or an h aspirated ; 

la, before a noun of the feminine gender, singular 
number, beginning with a consonant or an h aspirated ; 

l\ before a noun of either gender, singular number, 
beginning with a vowel or a mute h ; 

les, before a noun of the plural number, of either 
gender, whether it begin with a vowel or a consonant. 

N. B — The pupil will remember that a m.vte 1\ a silent h, and an 
h not aspirated, are synonymous; that is, they mean the same thing 



10 




j 


ELEMENTARY 










Vocabulary. 




Book, 


livre, m. 






King, 


roi, m. 


Brother, 


frere, m. 






Lion, 


lion, m. 


Cow, 


vache, f. 






Man, 


homme, m. h silent. 


Coat, 


habit, m. 


7i mute 




Mind, 


esprit, m. 


Dog, 


chien, m. 






Pen, 


plume, f. 


Ear, 


oreille, f. 






Queen, 


reine, f. 


Friend, 


ami, m. 






Sister, 


scewr, f. 


Grass, 


herbe, f. h mute. 




Star, 


efoz7e, f. 


Head, 


tfete, f. 






Soul, 


dme, f. 


Ink, 


encre, f. 






Work, 


ouvrage, m. 



N. B. — All the nouns used in the Exercises on the Article, foim 
the plural by adding s to the singular. 

Kule for the Article. — Every Article must agree 
in gender and number with the noun to which it re- 
lates. 

Exercise 1. 
The king, the dog, the book. The queen, the pen, the cow. The 
mind, the work, the man. The star, the ink, the grass. The pens, 
the stars, the books. The lion, the head, the ear, the sister, the 
kings, the friend, the coat, the men, the soul, the brother, the ears, 
the grass, the brothers, the sisters, the men. 



§ 2. De is the French word for of and from. But. 
of the zmdfrom the are expressed by 

du, (instead of de le, of which it is a contraction,) 
before a noun of the masculine gender, singular num- 
ber, beginning with a consonant or an h aspirated ; 

de la, before a noun of the feminine gender, singular 
number, beginning with a consonant or an h aspirated ; 

de l\ before a noun of either gender, singular num- 
ber, beginning with a vowel or an h mute ; 

des, (a contraction of de les,) before nouns of the 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 11 

plural number, and of either gender, whether they 
begin with a consonant or not. 

Exercise 2. 

Of tlie kiDg. From the book. Of the queen. From the pen. 
Of the work. Of the man. From the lion. From the grass. Of 
the friends. From the stars. The dogs of the queen. The coat 
of the brother. The ears of the dog. The head of the cow. The 
sister of the friend. The mind of the man. The books of the men. 

Remark. — Du, de la, de V , and des, are also used to 
express the possessive case of nouns-; thus, The king's 
brother, le frlre du rot; the queen's sister, la soeur de 
la reine. 

Exercise 3. 

The king's coat. The queen's friend. The man's dog. The 
queen's brother. The brother of the queen. The king's sisters. 
The sisters of the king. From the cow's head. Of the lion's ear. 
The dog's ears. The king's books. The kings' coats. The men's 
cows. The cows' heads. The brother's coat. Of the queen's dogs. 



§ 3. A is the French word for to. But to the is 
expressed by 

an, (instead of a le, of which it is a contraction,) 
before a noun of the masculine gender, singular num- 
ber, beginning with a consonant or an h aspirated ; 

a la, before a noun of the feminine gender, singular 
number, beginning with a consonant or an h aspirated ; 

a V, before a noun of either gender, singular num- 
ber, beginning with a vowel or a silent h; 

aux, (a contraction of a les,) before nouns of the 
plural number. 



12 



ELEMENTARY 



N. B. — The pupil must 
as this accent distinguishes 
for has. 



not omit the grave accent ( v ) over a, to, 
the word d, to, from a, the French word 





Vocal 


ulary. 




And, 


et. 


History, 


histoire, f. h silent. 


Boy, 


gar con, m. 


Honor, 


honneur, m. h silent. 


Child, 


enfant, m. 


Hour, 


heure, f. h silent. 


Door, 


jporte, f. 


Justice, 


justice, f. 


Father, 


jpere, m. 


Mother, 


mere, f. 


Finger, 


doigt, m. 


School, 


ecole, f. 


Glove, 


gant, m. 


Tooth, 


dent, f. 


Garden, 


jar din, m. 


Tree, 


arbre, m. 


Hand, 


main, f. 


Truth, 


verite, f. 



Exercise 4. 
To the boy, to the garden. To the door, to the hand. To the 
tree, to the school. To the honor, to the hour. To the boys, to 
the doors, to the trees, to the histories. To the ear, to the ears. To 
the tooth, to the teeth. To the finger of the boy. To the hand of 
the mother. To the trees of the garden. To the sister of the 
boys. To the hands of the child. To the justice of the king. To 
the gloves of the children. To the truth of the history. 



§ 4. The rules given above for rendering the article 
into French, may be briefly expressed as follows : 

Before a plural noun the is expressed by les; of the 
and from the, by des; to the, by aux. 

Before a singular noun of either gender, beginning 
with a vowel or a silent h, the is expressed by V ; of the 
and from the, by de V ; to the, by a l\ 

Before a singular noun of the feminine gender, be- 
ginning w'.tli a consonant or an h aspirate, the is ex- 
pressed by la; of the and from the, by de la; to the, 
by a la. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 13 

Before a singular noun of the masculine gender, be- 
ginning with a consonant or an h aspirate, the is ex- 
pressed by le; of the and from the, by du; to the, by au. 

Exercise 5. 

The father, of the father, to the father, from the father. The 
mother, of the mother, to the mother, from the mother. The fa- 
thers, of the fathers, to the fathers, from the fathers. The child, 
of the child, to the child, from the child. The children, of the chil- 
dren, to the children, from the children. The hour, to the hour, 
of the hours. The man, of the man, to the men. Of the histories. 
From the histories. The boy's friend. The sister's mind. The 
child's ear. The teeth of the lion. Send (envoy ez) the children to 
the school. To the sister of the king. Bring (apportez) the boys' 
pens. To the stars, To the ink. 

§ 5. In- English, when two or more nouns are con- 
nected by the conjunction and, the article is some- 
times expressed before the first noun only, and omit- 
ted before the others ; but in French, the article must 
be repeated before each of the nouns. 

The same remark applies to the prepositions a 
and de. 

Exercise 6. 

The pen and ink. The ear and hand of the man. The friend of 
the father, mother, and children. To the kings and queens. The 
books of the brothers and sisters. The children's mother and father. 
Send the books, pens, and ink to the school. Bring the boy's coat 
and gloves to the door. The king's truth and justice. The child's 
ear and fingers. To the honor and justice of the boy. The queen's 
brothers and sisters. The children's friend. Send the gloves to the 
men and boys. Of the friend's work. The king's friends. To the 
queen's gardens. To the father, mother, and child. Send the boys' 
coats to the man. 

2 



14 ELEMENTARY 

Remark. — In every French grammar, various rules are given for 
the use and omission of the article, but they do not come within the 
scope of so elementary a work as this. * The following one, however, 
is so important to the beginner, that it is inserted. 

§ 6. Rule. — All French nouns used in the widest 
sense, must be preceded by the definite article. 

In English, nouns taken in their widest sense are used without an 
article. Thus in saying, Man is mortal, we mean by man, all man- 
hind. When we say, Birds fly, fishes swim, quadrupeds have four 
feet, we do not mean some birds, some fishes, some quadrupeds, but 
all birds, fishes, quadrupeds. In the French language, the reverse 
of this takes place. 

N. B. — In the following exercise, write in French the nouns only 
with their appropriate articles. 

Exercise 7. 

Kings and queens are mortal. Children love to play. Ink is 
liquid. Mind cannot die. Friends are invaluable. Grass is green. 
Men love truth and justice. Honor is often misunderstood. Lions 
roar. Boys should not be mischievous. Man's honor. The his- 
tories of kings and queens. Truth is precious. Stars twinkle. Dogs 
and lions are carnivorous. Cows eat grass. Kings should be just. 

§ 7. Proper Nouns. — (1.) Names of countries take 
the definite article before them ; as, Europe, V Europe. 
Unless they are preceded by a verb signifying 
dwelling j going, or coming, when the article must be 
omitted. In these instances, in and to must be trans- 
lated by en, and from, by de; as, 

He is in France, 11 est en France, 

He comes from France,. 11 vient de France. 

He is going to Frauce, 11 va en France. 

N. B. — Several exceptions to this general rule are found in Frencn 
grammars, which the pupil will learn hereafter. 

(2.) The names of persons, cities, and towns, are used 
in French as in English, without the article. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 



15 



SECT. E. THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 



A or an, 
A or an, 



un, masc. smg. 
une, fern. sing. 



§ 8. A or an is translated into French by un be- 
fore a noun of the masculine gender, and by line be- 
fore a noun of the feminine gender, whether the 
French noun begin with a consonant or a vowel. 

Masc. Fern. 

Of a or an, d'un, d'une. 

To a or an, a un, a une. 

From a or an, d } un, d\me. 







Vocabulary. 




Apple, 


pomme, f. 




Perfume, 


parfum, m. 


Apricot, 


abricot, m. 




Pink, 


ceillet, m. 


Cloth, 


drap, m. 




Plum, 


prune, f. 


House, 


malson, f. 




Rose, 


rose, f. 


Lemon, 


citron j m. 




Silk, 


so/e, f. 


Orange, 


orange, f. 




Snow-drop, 


perce-neige, f. 


Peach, 


peche, f. 




Strawberry, 


/raise, f. 


Pencil, 


crayon, m. 




Violet, 


violette, f. 



Exercise 8. 
A rose, an orange, a pink, an apple. Of a lemon, of a plum, of a 
violet, of an apricot. To a pink, »to a snow-drop, to a father, to a 
child. A history of a king. The head of a lion. A sister of the 
queen. To a garden. To a house. Bring a pencil and a book. 
Send an apple and an orange to the boy's mother. Of an hour. 
The fingers of a glove. A lion's ears. From a king. Have you 
(avez-vous) a pen ? Will you have (youlez-vous) an apricot ? The 
trees of a garden. From a friend, from a star, from a child, from a 
history. The perfume of a violet. To the door of a house. 



its 



ELEMENTARY 



SECT III. THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE. 
Some or any, du, de la, deV, des, de, d\. 

§ 9. The partitive article, du, de la, del', des, de, d\ 
(Englished by some or any, expressed or understood,) 
is used to express a portion of a whole thing, or part 
of a quantity of things. 

Some or any is expressed in French by 

du, before a noun masculine, singular, commencing 
with a consonant or h aspirate ; 

de la, before a noun feminine, singular, commenc- 
ing with a consonant or h aspirate ; 

de V , before a noun singular, commencing with a 
vowel or silent h ; 

des, before a noun of the plural number ; 

de, before an adjective commencing with a conso- 
nant or h aspirate, or, in a negative sentence, before a 
noun of either number commencing with a conso- 
nant or h aspirate; 

d\ before an adjective commencing with a vowel or 
h mute, or, in a negative sentence, before a noun com- 
mencing with a vowel or h mute. 





Vocab 


ulary. 




Beef, 


bosuf, m. 


Milk, 


la it, m. 


Beauty, 


bcauti, f. 


Modesty, 


modes tie, f. 


Bread, 


pain, in. 


Mutton, 


mention, m. 


Butter, 


benrre, m. 


Prudence, 


■prudence, f. 


Coffee, 


tafiy m. 


Silver, 


argent, m. 


Cream, 


crime, f. 


Sugar, 


sucre, m. 


Gold, 


or , m. 


Tea, 


the, m. 


Grape, 


raisin, m. 


Wine, 


via, in 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 17 

Exercise 9. 
Some bread and some cream. Some strawberries and some apri- 
cots. Have you any lemons ? Will you have some ink ? Send 
some peaches to the child's mother. Some histories. Some pru- 
dence. Have you any grapes ? Some houses. Some pencils. Have 
you any pinks ? Some sugar and some tea. Bring some grapes, some 
oranges, and some lemons. Some work. Some cloth and some silk 

§ 10. Some or any is often understood in English 
without being expressed ; but when it is understood, 
the partitive article must be expressed in French, 
and must be repeated before every noun where it is 
understood. 

Exercise 10. 
Some coffee, tea, and sugar. Will you have milk or (ou) cream ? 
Send some books, pens, and ink to the boys. Have you any bread 
and butter ? I have (j'ai) snow-drops and violets. Will you have 
beef or mutton ? She has (elle a) beauty and modesty. Send some 
strawberries and cream to the boy's sister. Bring some pinks and roses. 
Will you have gold or silver? He has (il a) apples and plums. She 
has a father and mother, brothers and sisters, children and friends. 

Remark 1. The pupil must •remember that it is when the 
French adjective precedes the noun that some and any are 
expressed by de or d'* ; by rfe, if the French adjective com- 
mences with a consonant, and by d\ if the adjective com- 
mences with a vowel or silent h. 

Exercise 11. 
Some bread. Some good (bon) bread. Have you any pens? 
Have you any good (bonnes) pens ? She has fine (belles) oranges. 
Bring some good (bonne) ink. Have you any new (nouveaux) books ? 
She has good (bons) friends. Have you coffee, tea, and sugar? 
Here are (void) some fine (belles) peaches. Bring some roses and 
violets. Have you fine (belles) cows? Send some grapes and 
oranges to the children. Have you good (bonnes) oranges? Will 
you have silk or cloth ? 



2 



# 



18 ELEMENTARY 

Exercise 12. 

Give me (donnez-rnoi) the boy's gloves, and send the coat to the 
school. Will you have coffee or tea ? The beauty of the stars. 
Have you any good (bonne) ink ? Send some ink to the boys. 
Have you any roses ? Here are some fine (belles) roses. The grass 
of the garden. The lion's tooth. A man's hands. Give me some 
snow-drops and violets. Send some bread and milk to the children. 
A dog's head. Send a rose and a pink to the child's sister. A star, 
an hour, a hand. The ears of lions and dogs. The rose's perfume. 

. Remark 2. In the following Exercise, no is equivalent to 
not any; and not, used with a verb, is expressed in French 
by placing ?ie before the verb and pas after it. Ne is written 
n J before a vowel or h mute. 

Exercise 13. 

Have you any bread ? I have no (not any) bread. He has no 
friends. I have no fine (.belles) oranges. She has prudence ; she 
has no beauty. Have you any books ? Have you any good (bons] 
books ? I have no apricots. I have no good (boiis) apricots. I 
have good (bonnes) plums. She has apples. He has fine (belles) 
apples. The boy has good (bonnes) pens. The brother has no good 
(bonnes) pens. Have you good*(6cw) wine ? I have no wine ; I 
have milk. The man has silver ; he has no gold. The child has no 
teeth. 

Remark 3. Some and any, meaning a feiv, and followed 
by a noun, are translated into French by quelques, as will be 
seen in the Section on the Indefinite Adjectives. 

Remark 4. Some and any, meaning a few, and not fol- 
lowed by a noun, will be explained in Chapter X, on the In- 
definite Pronouns. 

Remark 5. Some and any, not followed by a noun, and 
used at the end of a sentence, will be explained in Chapter VII, 
on the Personal Pronouns. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 19 



CHAPTER II. 

THE FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF FRENCH NOUNS. 

§ 11. To form the plural of French nouns, add s 
to the singular; as pere, father, pdres, fathers. 

Exception 1. Nouns ending in s, x, or z, in the singular, do 
not vary in the plural; as fils, son, fils, sons. 

Exception 2. Ntfuns ending in au or eu, add x to form the 
plural; as eau, water, eaux, waters. 

Exception 3. The following nouns in ou take x to form the 
plural; viz: bijou, jewel; caillou, pebble; chou, cabbage ; 
genou, knee ; hibou, owl ; pou, louse ; joujou, plaything. 

Verrou, bolt, has verrow for the plural, according to the French 
Academy, but in most dictionaries, verroux is given as the plural. 

N. B. Remember that all other French nouns in ou form their 
plural regularly, by the addition of s. 

Exception 4. Nouns ending in al change this termination 
into aux to form the plural ; as cheval, horse, chevaux, horses. 

But bal, ball; carnaval, carnival; regal, feast, and a few otheis, 
form their plural regularly, by the addition of s to the singular. 

Exception 5. The following nouns in ail form their plural 
by changing ail into aux; viz: bail, lease; email, enamel; 
corail, coral ; travail, work ; soupirail, air-hole ; vantail, leaf 
of a folding door; ventail, the part of a helmet which admits 
air. 

Other French nouns in ail form their plural regularly by adding 
s to the singular. 



20 



ELEMENTARY 



Exception 6. Ciel, heaven, has cieux in the plural. 6E7/, 
eye, has yeux. Jiitul, ancestor, has aieux. 

N. B. There are a fev irregularities in the formation of the plural of nouns 
which are not mentioned here, because they are not important to the young 
student. They can be found in almost any French grammar. 

Exercise 14. 

pupil will commit to memory the following 
nouns, and write them in the plural. 



The 
French 

Animal, 
Arm, 
Ball, 
Bird, 

Bolt, 

Bone, 

Brook, 

Cabbage, 

Cage, 

Carnival, 

Cent, 

Cloak, 

Coral, 

Country, 

Cradle, 

Cross, 

Crystal, 

Daughter, 

Day, 

Detail, 

Evil, 

The 
French 
Lamb, 
Lease, 
Lesson, 

Louse, 



animal, m. Eye, oeil, m. 

bras, m. Fan, ev entail, m. 

bat, m. Feast, regal, m. 

oiseau, m. Fire, feu, m. 

Fool, fou, m. 

Foot, pied, m. 

Game, Jen, m. 

General, ^general, m. 

Girl, fille, f. 

Hammer, 

Hat, 

Hair, (a) 

Halter, 

Heaven, 

Height, 

Hero, 

Hole, 

Horse, 

Jewel, 

Knee, 

Knife, 
Exercise 15. 
pupil will commit to memory the following 
nouns, and write them in the plural. 
arpieau, m. Mallet, mail, m. 

bail, m. Month, mois, m. 

lecon, f. Mouth, bouche } f. 

lis, in. Mouse, souris, f. 

pou, m Nail, clou, m. 



os, m. 
ruissa 
clwu, m. 
cage, f. 
carnaval, m. 
sou, m. 
manteau, m. 
corail, m. 
pays, m. 
berccau, m. 
croix, f. 
cristal, m. 
fille, f. 
jour, m. 
detail, m. 
mal, m. 



cJiapeaiin m. 
cheveu, m. 
licou, m. 
del, m. 

hauteur, f. A -asp. 
AeVos, m. h asp. 
tfrow, m. 
cheval, m. 
frybu, m. 
genou, m. 
couteau, m. 



FKEXCH EXERCISES. 



21 



Neighbor, 


voisin, m. 


Son, 


jils, m. 


Nephew, 


neveu, m. 


Stocking, 


bas, m. 


Night, 


nuit, f. 


Table, 


table, f. 


Nose, 


nez, "m. 


Tongue, 


langue, f. 


Owl, 


hibou, m. h asp. 


Tooth, 


cfe?i£, f. 


Palace, 


palais, m. 


Thumb, 


jpouce, m. 


Pebble, 


caillou, m. 


Value, 


pn#, m. 


Pine-apple 


, ananas, m. 


Vessel, 


vaisseau, r 


Place, 


lieu , m." 


Voice, 


floia:, f. 


Plaything, 


joujou, m. 


Walnut, 


nozx, f. 


Price, 


jprix, m. 


Water, 


ea^, f. 


Ring, 


anneau, m. 


Weight, 


jpoids, m. 


Room, 


chambre, f. 


Wind, 


ve/itf, m. 


Rudder, 


gouvernail, m, 


Woman, 


femime, f. 


Shoe, 


Soulier, m. 


Wood, 


Z>ois, m. 


Sheep, 


brebis, f. 


Work, 


travail, m 


Sky, 


czeZ, m. 


Worth, 


pr£c, m. 



m. 



Exercise 16. 

The rudders of the vessels. The eyes of the birds. The voices 
of the generals. The queen's jewels. The children's playthings. 
Bring some cabbages from the garden. Give me the boys' hats and 
cloaks. From the palaces. Give me some strawberries, some le- 
mons, a pine-apple, and some fine (belles) oranges. The boy's friend 
has gold and silver. Here are some good (bonnes) pens. The man 
has horses and cows. The teeth of the mice. Will you have wine 
or water? Have you any good (bonne) water? The boy's arms. 

Exercise 17. 

The halters of the horses. The voice of the kero. The sons of 
the heroes. The prices of the fans. Here are some nails and bolts. 
The bones of the arm. The pebbles of the brooks. Have you any 
pine-apples? The lilies of the gardens. The head, mouth, and teeth 
of a ' sheep. The price of the horses. The voices of the birds. 
Bring some crystals. Of the waters and winds. To the balls of the 
queen. The eyes of the owl. To the skies. The ear and eye of 
man. Send some pine-apples and peaches to the neighbors. 



22 



ELEMENTARY 



CHAPTER III. 
ON THE ADJECTIVE. 

SECT. I. THE FORMATION OF THE FEMININE OF FRENCH 
ADJECTIVES. 



§ 12. Rule 1. — Adjectives ending with e mute 
have their masculine and feminine alike; as digne, 
digne, worthy. 

§ 13. Rule 2. — The feminine of adjectives which 
do not end with e mute, is generally formed by ad- 
ding e mute to the masculine ; as mechant, mechante, 
wicked. 

Exception 1. — Adjectives ending with f change this letter 
into ve ; as bref, breve, short. 

Exception 2. — Adjectives ending with x change this letter 
into se ; as heureux, heureuse, happy. 

Exception 3. — Adjectives ending in 



elf * 

eil, 

en, 

ct, 

on. 



make their feminine in 



' eUe, 
eille, 
cnne, 
ette, 
onne. 



as tel, telle, such ; pareil, pareille, like ; ancien, ancie?i?ie, 
ancient ; muet, muette, dumb ; bon, bo?uie, good. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 



23 



The following list includes many of the adjectives in com- 
mon use which do not form their feminine gender agreeably to 
the rules given above. 



Masc. 


Fern. • 


English. 




Doux, 


douce, 


sweet. 




Faux, 


fausse, 


false. 




Nid, 


nulle, 


no. 




Gentil, 


gentille, 


kind or pretty 


Sot, 


sotte, 


silly. 




Bas, 


basse, 


low. 




Gras, 


grasse, 


fat. 




Las, 


lasse, 


weary. 




Epais, 


epaisse, 


thick. 




Gros, 


grosse, 


large. 




Frais, 


fraiche, 


fresh. 




Blanc, 


Blanche, 


white. 




Franc, 


franche, 


frank. 




Sec, 


seche, 


dry. 




Public, 


publique, 


public. 




Long, 


longue, 


long. 




B6nin, 


henigne, 


benign. 




Malin, 


maligne, 


malicious. 




Trompeur, 


trompeuse, 


deceitful. 




Favori, 


favorite, 


favorite. 




Before a noun 


Before a noun 






masculine, be- 


masculine, be- 






ginning with a 


ginning with a 






consonant or h 


vowel or h 






aspirated. 


mute. 


Fem. 


English. 


Beau, 


Bel, 


belle, 


beautiful 


Nbuveau, 


nouvel, 


nouvelle, 


new. 


Fou f 


fol, 


foUe, 


foolish. 


M0Uy 


mol, 


molle, 


soft. 


Vieux, 


vieil } 


vieille, 


old. 



24 



ELEMENTARY 



Exercise 18. 

The pupil will commit to memory the following 
French adjectives, and write them in the feminine 
singular. 

Actif, active. 
Age, old. 
Amer* bitter. 
Ancien, ancient. 
Attentif, attentive. 
Aveugle, blind. 
Avide, greedy. 
Bleu, blue. 
Bon, good. 
Bref, short. 
Captif, captive. 



Car 



re, square. 



Cher,* dear. 
Content, pleased. 
Coupable, guilty. 
Courageux, courageous. 
Digne, worthy. 
Difficile, difficult. 
Dur, hard. 
Envieux, envious. 
Fidele, faithful. 
Grand, great, tall. 
Gris, grey. 
Heureux, happy. 
Ingrat, ungrateful. 
Injuste, unjust. 
Jaune, yellow. 
Jeune, young. 



Leger,* light. 
Malade, sick. 
Malheureux, unhappy. 
Mediant, wicked. 
Mortel, mortal. 
Muet, dumb. 
JVaturel, natural. 
Nbir, black. 
Odoriferant, fragrant. 
Oisif, idle. 
Orgueilleux, proud. 
Pareil, like. 
Paresseux, lazy. 
Pauvre, poor. 
Pensif, thoughtful. 
Precieux, precious. 
Pourpre, purple. 
Propre, clean. 
Pond, round. 
Rouge, red. 
Soigneux, careful. 
Sourd, deaf. 
Triste, sad. 
Vermeil, rosy. 
Vert, green. 
Vertueux, virtuous. 
Vif, quick, lively. 
Vindicatif, revengeful. 



Neuf, new, that has not been used. 

Nouveau, new, newly published. 
* Adjectives ending in er, form the feminine not only by the addition 
of e mute, but require a grave accent Q) to be placed over the e pre 
ceding the final r. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 



25 



SECT. II. THE PLURAL OF ADJECTIVES. 

§ 14. The masculine plural of adjectives is formed 
like that of nouns, and the feminine plural is formed 
from the feminine singular by adding, s. 

Except, bleu, blue, makes bleus ; and tout, all, makes 
tons, in the plural masculine. 

Remark, — Participles, when used as adjectives, form their 
feminine by the addition of a mute e, and their plural by the 
addition of s. 



Exercise 19. 



-i-» n» 



The pupil will commit to memory the followii 
French adjectives and participles, and write them in 
the feminine singular, masculine plural, and femi- 
nine plural. 



Aime, 


loved. 


Fort, 


strong. 


Affreux, 


frightful. 


Frangais, 


French. 


Americain, 


American. 


Gauche, 


left, awkward. 


Anglais , 


. English. 


Gene reus, 


generous. 


Brurij 


brown. 


Honnete, 


honest. 


CapricieuXj 


whimsical. 


Italien, 


Italian. 


Court, 


short. 


Jaloux, 


jealous. 


Cruel, 


cruel. 


Lent, 


slow. 


Curieux, 


curious. 


Mur, 


ripe. 


Dangereux, 


dangerous. 


Perdu, 


lost. 


Dernier, 


last. 


Plein, 


full. 


Donne, 


given. 


Fret, 


ready. 


Droit, 


right. 


Pris, 


taken. 


Da, 


owed. 


Punt, 


punished. 


Ecrit, • 


written. 


Pegu, 


received. 


Egal, 


equal. 


Seul, 


alone, only 


Eu, 


had. 


Suivi, 


followed. 


Fier, 


haughty. 


Vendu, 


sold. 


Fin, 


fine, not coarse. 


Vu, 


seen. 



26 ELEMENTARY 

SECT. III. THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 

§ 15. (1.) Most French adjectives follow the noun 
to which they refer. 

(2.) The following are commonly placed before the noun. 



Beau, handsome, 


fine. 


Mediant, wicked. 


Bon, good. 




Meilleur, better. 


Cher, dear, meaning loved. 
Grand, great. 


Heme, same. 
Moindre, less. 


Gros } large. 




Petit, small, little 


Jeune, young. 
Joliy pretty. 
Mauvais, bad. 




Saint ? holy. 
Tout, all. 
Yieux, old. 



(3.) The numeral adjectives, also, are placed before the 
noun, except when speaking of titles. 

(4.) Some adjectives have different meanings, according as 
they are placed before or after the noun. Thus 

Tin grand homme, 
Un homme GRAND, 
Un BRAVE homme, 
Un homme brave, 
Un honnete homme, 
Un homme honnete, 
Un PAUVRE auteur, 
Un auteur pauvre, 

Cher, dear, meaning high-priced, is placed after the noun ; as, un 
habit cher, a dear coat. 

Bon has not its usual meaning before the word homme, man ; for 
un BON homme means a simpleton, or an artless man with little sense; 
vn homme BON means a good-natured man. With all other words 
bon has its usual meaning, and is placed before them. 

N.B. For the other adjectives whose signification varies according to 
llieir position, the pupil is referred to a French grammar or dictionary. 

(5.) Many French adjectives can be placed either before or 
after their nouns, as the sound, perspicuity, or emphasis requires. 



means 


a great man. 


it 


a tall man. 


u 


a good man. 


a • 


a brave man. 


tc 


an honest man. 


c( 


a polite man. 


cc 


an author without merit. 


(C 


an author without a fortune 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 27 

SECT. IV. THE AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 

Rule 1. — Every adjective mast agree in gender and num- 
ber with the noun or pronoun to which it refers. 

Rule 2. — If an adjective is used to qualify two or more nouns 
in the singular number of the same gender, it must be put in 
the plural^ and agree with them in gender ; as, 
The father and uncle are pleased. 
Le pere et Voncle sont contents. 
The mother and aunt are pleased. 
La mere et la tante sont contentes. 
If the nouns to which the adjective relates are of different 
genders, the adjective is to be put in the masculine plural ; as. 
The father and mother are pleased. 
Le pere et la mere sont contents. 

Exercise 20. 
A handsome horse. A fine cow. The handsome horses of my 
(mon) friend. The neighbor's fine cows. The old woman is (est) 
blind and deaf. The blind man is happy. He has a faithful dog 
and a fine garden. The brother and sister are (sont) happy. We 
have delicious peaches and apricots. The queen has grey horses. 
The king's brother is a tall man. The children's mother is a coura- 
geous woman. A pretty child. The envious girl is unhappy. 

Remark. — The pupil must remember that, although some is 
expressed by de or d' before an adjective, (see §f9,)yet of the 
is invariably translated by du, de la, de V and des, as explained 
in § 2. 

Exercise 21. 

I have fine sheep. The price of the fine sheep. You have pretty 
lambs. The beauty of the young lambs. An English boy. An Italian 
girl. The public voice. A clean house. I have white stockings 
and black shoes. The right hand and the left hand. The history 
of good kings. Send me some blue violets. The perfume of the 
blue violet is delicious. He sells bad apples. We have no ripe 
peaches. You have a short lesson. The queen had a haughty soul. 



28 ELEMENTARY 

SECT. V. THE COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 



§ 16. Examples of adjectives compared regularly, 

Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

Sage, 'plats sage, 

Wise, wiser, 

HeureuXj plus heureux, 

Happy, happier, 

HonteuXy plus honteux, 

Shameful, more shameful, 

Utile, moins utile. 

Useful, less useful, 



le plus sage. 
the wisest. 
le plus heureux. 
the happiest. 
le plus Iwnteux. 
the most shameful. 
le moins utile. 
the least useful. 



More amiable than, plus aimable que. 

Less studious than, moins studieux que. 

Not so fatal as, pas aussi funeste que. 

As delicious as, aussi delicieux que. 

N. B. — Que is written qu' before a vowel or silent h. 

Exercise 22. 

The rose is more beautiful than the violet. This (cette) apple ig 
as delicious as a pine-apple. She is less studious than her (sa) sister. 
A rose as white as the lily. Peaches are more delicious than ap- 
ples. The greatest of evils. The happiest child. The least amia- 
ble of the sisters. The most wicked of men. The snow-drop is 
not so fragrant as the violet. The perfume of the rose is sweeter 
than that (celui) of the pink. Gold is more precious than silver. 
Silver is less precious "than gold. The night is as short as the day. 

Exercise 23. 

The most cruel of kings. The most generous of queens. The 
plum is less sweet than the peach. The lion is the strongest of 
animals. The beauty of the white lily is not equal to that (ceHe) 
of the white rose. The mother and the children are ready. The 
peaches are riper than the plums. The history of the evils. The 
prices of the mallets. A woman less err el and whimsical than the 
queen. We have purple grapes and red apples. A beautiful bird. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 29 

§ 17. The following adjectives are compared irre- 
gularly, thus : 

Bon, good, meilleur, better, le meilleur, the best. 

Petit j little, or moindre, less, or le moindre, the least, 

small, smaller, or smallest. 

Mauvais, bad, pire, worse, le pire, the worst. 

Remark. — Better and best, when adjectives, are always translated 
by meilleur and le meilleur; but less may be translated by plus petit, 
as well as by moindre, and worse by plus mauvais, as well as by pire. 

Exercise 24. 

Give me a better pen and blacker ink. The value (yaleur, f.) of 
silver is less than that (celle) of gold. The apple is good, but (mats) 
the peach is better. Give me the worst of the pens. The best of 
the brothers. The height of the house is less than that (celle) of 
the tree. A better house. The pen is bad. The ink is worse. Have 
you a better book? The worst of evils. 

§ 18. The pupil should be careful not to confound the pre- 
ceding adjectives with the following adverbs, which are like- 
wise irregularly compared. 

ADVERBS. 

Bien, well, mieux, better, le mieux, the best. 

Peu, little, moins, less, le moins, the least. 

Mai, badly, pis, worse, le pis, the worst. 

Exercise 25. 

N. B. The pupil will find in the Appendix the verbs used in the following 
exercises, unless they are inserted in the exercise. 

I write little, but you write less. The little child has red shoes. 
The pen is better than the ink. The sister reads better than the 
brother. The price Gf the cloth is less than that (celui) of the silk.-tfc- 
The apples are sweet, the peaches are sweeter. The neighbor does 
badly; his (son) brother does worse. The height of the trees is 
greater than that (celle of the house. Give me riper plums. • 
3* 



30 



ELEMENTARY 



Remark. — In English, nouns are used as adjectives when the? 
are placed before other nouns which they describe; as, A cloth coat. 
But in French, the noun which is used as an adjective, is placed 
after the other, with a preposition between them to express their re- 
lation to each other. 

When the first noun denotes the material of which anything 
is made, it is placed after the second noun, with the preposition 
de between them ; as, A cloth coat, Un habit de drap. 

N. B. Other relations between nouns are variously expressed in French, 
but they do not come within the scope of so elementary a work as this. 
The pupil will find them explained in French grammars. 







Vocabulary. 




Edward, 


Edouarcl. 




Lucy, 


Lucie. 


Emily, 


Emilie. 




Mary, 


Maine. 


George, 


George. 




Matilda, 


Mathilde. 


Henry, 


Henri. 




Peter, 


Pierre. 


John, 


Jean. 




Sophia, 


Sophie. 


Julia, 


Julie. 




Stephen, 


Etienne. 


Louisa, 


Louise. 


Exerci 


William, 
'se 26. 


Guillaume 



Mary has a silver knife and a gold pencil. Will you have silk 
stockings ? Sophia writes well, but Emily writes better. Henry is 
older than William. Mary is more careful than Matilda. Edward 
is the most active of the boys. Emily is the most attentive of the 
girls. Julia has blue gloves. A queen more benign than Mary. 
Will you have a longer lesson ? Sophia has a little bird in a small 
cage. Louisa is lazier than Lucy. George shall have a silver pen- 
cil. Peter is taller than Stephen. She is as young and as beautiful 
as Emily. We have no sweet wine. A king less revengeful than 
John. A lesson badly written. 

N.B. All the verbs used in the exorcises are either found in the 
Appendix, or are conjugated like the verbs therein conjugated. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 



31 



SECT. VL NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 
(Extracted by permission from Bolmar's Colloquial Phrases.) 

N. B "When a number is named without a noun after it, it is pronounced as 
it is wrkten opposite the figures, or as it is spelt between a parenthesis ( ), taking 
care not to pronounce the letter or letters marked in italics. 

When some of the numbers are followed by a noun, their pronunciation va- 
ries according as that noun begins with a consonant, a vowel, or an h mute.— 
See the directions given in small print, under every number that needs any di- 
rections. 



Noinbres Cardinaux. 

1 un, masc. 

1 une ; fern. 

2 deux, 

deu, before a consonant. 

deuz, before a vowel or an h mute. 

3 tro-is, 

troi, before a consonant. 

troiz, before a vowel or an h mute. 

4 quatre, 

5 cinq, 

cin, before a consonant. 

cink, before a vowel or an h mute. 

6 six (sis) 

si, before a consonant. 

siz, before a vowel or an h mute. 

7 sept, 

se, before a consonant. 

set, before a vowel or an h mute. 

8 huit, 

hui, before a consonant. 

huit, before a vowel or av. h mute. 

9 neuf, 

neu, before a consonant. 

neuv, before a vowel or an i mute. 



Cardinal Numbers* 

one. 
one. 
two. 



three. 



four, 
jive. 



six. 



seven. 



eight. 



nine. 



6Z . ELEMENTARY 




10 dix (dis) 


ten. 


di ; before a consonant. 




(Hz, before a vowel or an h mute. 




11 onze, 


eleven. 


12 douze, 


twelve. 


13 treize, 


thirteen. 


14 quatorze, 


fourteen. 


15 quinze, 


fifteen. 


16 seize, 


sixteen. 


17 dix-sept, (dis-set) 


seventeen. 


18 dix-huit ; (di-zuit) 


eighteen. 


19 dix-neuf, (diz-neuf) 


nineteen. 


20 vmgt, 


twenty. 


In all the following, pronounce the t in vingt very i 


strongly. 


21 viD^t et un, (vin te un) 


twenty-one. 


22 vin^t-deux, 


twenty-two. 


23 vin</t-trois, 


twenty-three. 


24 vingrt-quatre, 


twenty-four. 


25 vin^t-cinq, 


twenty -five. 


26 vin^t-six, 


twenty-six. 


27 vin^t-sept, 


twenty-seven. 


28 vin^t-huit, 


twenty -eight. 


29 vim/t-neuf, 


twenty -nine. 


In the folldwing, pronounce the t in trente very stronglv. 


30 trente, 


thirty. 


31 trente et un, 


thirty-one. 


32 trente-deux, 


thirty -two. 


33 trente-trois, 


thirty -three. 


34 trente-quatre, 


thirty-four. 


35 trente-cinq, 


thirty-five. 


36 trente-six (sis) 


thirty-six. 


37 trente-sept, 


thirty-seven. 


38 trente -huit, 


thirty-eight 


39 trente-neuf, 


thirty-nine. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 33 

In all the following, pronounce the t in quarante very strongly. 

40 quarante, forty. 

41 quarante et un, forty-one. 

42 quarante-deu#, forty-two. 

43 quarante-trois, forty-three. 

44 quarante-quatre, forty -four. 

45 quarante-cinq, forty-jive. 

46 quar ante-six, (sis) forty -six. 

47 quarante-sept, forty-seven. 

48 quarante-huit, forty-eight. 

49 quarante-neuf, forty-nine. 
In all the following, pronounce the £ in cinquante very strongly. 

50 cinquante, fifty- 

51 cinquante e£ un, fifty -one. 

52 cinquante-deux, fifty-two. 

53 cinquante-trois, fifty -three, 

54 cin quant e-quatre, fifty -four. 

55 cinquante-cinq, .fifty fi ve - 

56 einquante-six, (sis) fifty -six. 

57 cinquante-sept, fifty-seven. 

58 cinquante-huit, fifty-eight. 

59 cinquante-neuf, fifty -nine. 

In all the following, pronounce soissant, giving to the 55 the strong and pure 
hissing sound of 5; and pronounce the t very strongly. 

60 soixante, sixty. 

61 soixante e/ un, sixty-one. 

62 soixante-deucc, sixty -two. 

63 soixante-trois, sixty-three. 

64 soixante-quatre, sixty-four. 

65 soixante-cinq, sixty-five. 

66 soixante-six, (sis) sixty-six. 

67 soixante-sept, sixty-seven. 

68 soixante-huit, sixty-eight. 

69 soixante-neuf, sixty -nine. 

70 soixante e£ dix, (dis) seventy. 



34 



ELEMENTARY 



71 soixante-onze, 




seventy-one. 


72 soixante-douze, 




seventy-two. 


73 soixante-treize, 




seventy-three. 


74 soixante-quatorze, 




seventy -four. 


75 soixante-quinze, 




seventy-Jive. 


76 soixante-seize, 




seventy-six. 


77 soixante-dix-sept, (dis) 




seventy -seven. 


78 soixante-dix-huit, (diz) 




. seventy -eight 


79 soixante-dix-neuf, (diz) 




seventy-nine. 


80 quatre-vin^s, 




eighty. 


81 quatre-vin^-un, 




eighty-one. 


82 quatre-vingtf-deux, 




eighty-two. 


83 quatre-vingtf-trois, 




eighty-three. 


84 quatre-vin^-quatre, 




eighty-four. 


85 quatre-vingtf-cinq, 




eighty -five. 


86 quatre-viD^-six ; (sis) 




eighty-six. 


87 quatre-viDg^-sept, 




eighty -seven. 


88 quatre-vmg^-huit, 




eighty-eight. 


89 quatre-vin^-neuf, 




eighty -nine. 


90 quatre-vin^-dix, (dis) 




ninety. 


91 quatre-vingtf-onze, 


• 


ninety-one. 


92 quatre-vingtf-douze, 




ninety-two. 


93 quatre-viiK^-treize, 




ninety-three. 


94 quatre-vingtf-quatorze, 




ninety -four. 


95 quatre-vin^-quinze, 




ninety-five. 


96 quatre-ving^-seize, 




ninety -six. 


97 quatre-vin^-dix-sept, (dis) 




ninety -seven. 


98 quatre-vin^-dix-huit, (diz) 




ninety -eight. 


99 quatre-vin^-dix-neuf, (diz) 




ninety-nine. 


100 cen£, 


one hundred. 




101 cent ud, 


one hundred and one. 


102 cent deux, 


one hundred, and two. 


103 cent trois, 


one hundred and three. 


104 cent quatre 


one hundred 


and four. 


105 cent cinq, 


one hundred 


and five. 



TRENCH EXERCISES. 



35 



106 cent six, (sis) 

107 cent sept, 

108 cent huit, 

109 cent ueuf, 

110 cent dix, (dis) 

111 cent onze, 

112 cen£ douze, 

113 cen£ treize, 

114 centf quatorze. 

115 cen£ quinze, 

116 centf seize, 

117 cen£ dix-sept, (dis) 

118 cen£ dix-huit, (diz) 

119 cen£ dix-neuf, (diz) 

120 cen£ \ingt, 

121 cent vin^t et un, 

122 cent vm^t-deux, 
200 deux cente, 
300 trois cenfe, 

400 quatre cente, 
500 cin^ cente, 
600 six cen&, 
700 sept cents, 
800 hui£ cente, 
900 neuf cents, 
1,000 mille, 
2,000 deux mille, 
3,000 trois mille, 
100,000 cen* mille, 
200,000 deux cen* mille, 
300,000 trois cen* mille, 
1,000,00C un million, 
2.000,000 deux millions, 
3,000,00C trois millions, 



one hundred and six. 

one hundred and seven. 

one hundred and eight. 

one hundred and nine. 

one hundred and ten. 

one hundred and eleven 

one hundred and twelve. 

one hundred and thirteen. 

one hundred and fourteen. 

one hundred and fifteen. 

one hundred and sixteen, 

one hundred and seventeen. 

one hundred and eighteen. 

one hundred and nineteen. 

one hundred and ticenty. 

one hundred and twenty -one. 

one hundred and twenty-two, &c 

two hundred. 

three hundred. 

four hundred. 

five hundred. 

six hundred. 

seven hundred. 

eight hundred. 

nine hundred, &c. 

one thousand. 

two thousand. 

three thousand, drc. 

one hundred thousand. 

two hundred thousand. 

three hundred thousand, &c. 

one million. 

two millions. 

three millions, &c. 



36 ELEMENTARY 

Note 1st. — "With tl.3 exception of an, une, one, the cardinal numbers 
are invariable in gender; that is, they are not altered to agree with nouns 
of the feminine gender. 

Note 2nd. — Although onze, eleven, and onzieme, eleventh, begin with 
a vowel, the definite article le, la, does not suffer elision before them, 
and the article les is pronounced as if onze began with an h aspirated; 
as, 

Le onzieme dieval, The eleventh horse. 

Les onze pommes, The eleven apples. 

Note 3rd. — The adjective quatre-vingts, eighty, drops the plural termi- 
nation (s,) when it is followed by another number; as, 



l crayons. Eighty pencils. 

Quatre-vingt-deux crayons, Eighty-two pencils. 

Jhn ai quatre-vingt-quatre, I have eighty-four. 

Note 4th. — Deux cents, trois cents, &c, are written with the plural ter- 
mination (.s,) when they are not followed by another number; as, 

Deux cents jours, Two hundred days. 

Deux cent un jours, Two hundred and one days. 

But these two adjectives, quatre-vingts and cent, do not take the plu- 
ral when they are used in dates instead of the ordinal adjectives, quatre- 
vmgtieme and centime. 

Charlemagne mourut en Van huit cent. 
Charlemagne died in the year 800. 

Ce malheur arrlva en Van cinq cent quatre-vin gt. 
This calamity happened in the year 5S0. 

Note 5th. — The adjective mille, thousand, never takes s as a mark of 
the plural ; as, 

Dix mille Iwmmes, Ten thousand men. 

The word thousand in dates, is written mil; as, 

E?i mil htiit cent cinquante, In 1S50. 

Although the preceding example is correct, it is more usual, and 
perhaps more elegant to say, 

En dix-htit cent cinquJiitc, In eighteen hundred and G 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 37 

The word mille, used as a noun, and meaning a mile, follows ae rule 
of nouns ; and takes the plural; as, 

Cent milks, A hundred miles. 

Note 6th. — A, and one, placed in English before hundred and thousand, 
are not expressed in French. 

Note 7^— The conjunction and, placed in English after hundred and 
thousand, when followed by another number, is not expressed in French; 



Cent cinquante tables^ One hundred and fifty tables. 

Note 8th. — The conjunction et, and, is used in French, although not in 
English, in the numbers vingt et un, twenty-one ) trente et un, thirty-one, 

KC. 

Note 9th. — The French Academy says a hyphen should neither imme- 
diately precede nor follow cent. 

Exercise 27. 

The pupil will write eleven lines of the Multiplication Table 
according to the following model ; 

Deux fois un font deux. 
Twice (two times) one are two. 



Nombres Ordinaux. Ordinal Numbers. 

Premier, masc. first 

premiere, fern. first 

second (segon) masc. second. 

seconde (segond) fern. second. 

Ffohi this, all the following are the same for the masc. and yew*, 
deuxieme, second. 

troisieme, third. 

quatrieme, fourth. 

cinquieme fifth. 

sixieme, sixth. 



38 ELEMENTARY 

se^tieme, seventh. 

huitieme, eighth. 

neuvieme, ninth. 

dixieme, tenth. 

on zi erne, eleventh. 

douzieme, ■ twelfth. 

treizienie, thirteenth. 

quatorzieme, fourteenth. 

quinzieme, fifteenth. 

seizieme, sixteenth. 

dix-septieme, (dis) seventeenth. 

dix-huitieme, (diz) eighteenth. 

dix-neuvieme, (diz) nineteenth. 

vin<7tieme ; twentieth. 

In all the following, pronounce the t in vingt very strongly. 

vin^fc et unieme, • twenty-first. 

vin^t-deuxieme, twenty-second. 

vin^t-troisieme, twenty -third. 

vm^t-quatrieme, twenty -fourth. 

vin^t-cmquieme, twenty-fifth. 

viru/t-sixieme, 'twenty-sixth. 

vin^t-septieme, twenty-seventh. 

vin^/t-huitieme, twenty-eighth. 

vin^t-neuvieme, twenty-ninth. 

trentieme, thirtieth. 

In all the following, pronounce the t in trente very strongly 

trente et unieme, thirty-first. 

trente-deuxieme, thirty -second. 

tren te-t roisieme, thirty-third. 

trente-quatrieme, th irty-fourth 

treute-cinquieme, th irtyfifth. 

trentc-sixieme, th irty-sixth. 

trente-septi&me, th irty -serai th. 

trente-liuitieme, thirty-eighth. 

trentc-iieuvieine, th irty-n in th. 

quarantieinc, fortieth. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 89 

In all the following, pronounce the t in quarante very strongly 

quarante et unieme, forty-first. 

quarante-deuxieme, • forty-second. 

quarante-troisieine, forty-third. 

quarante-quatrieme, forty-fourth. 

quarante-cinquieme. forty-fifth. 

quarante-sixieme, forty-sixth. 

quarante-septieme, forty-seventh. 

quarante-huitieme, % forty -eighth. 

quarante-neuvieme, forty-ninth. 

In all the following, pronounce the t in cmqua?ite very strongly. 

cinquantiemej fiftieth. 

cinquante et unieme, fifty -first. 

cinquante-deuxieme, fifty -second. 

cinquante-troisieme, fifty-third. 

cinquante-quatrieme, fifty -fourth. 

cinquante-cinquieme, fifty-fifth. 

cinquante-sixieme, fifty-sixth. 

cinquante-septieme, fifty-seventh. 

cinquante-huitieme, fifty-eighth. 

cinquante-neuvieme, fifty-ninth. 

In all tne following, pronounce soissant, giving to the ss the strong and pure 
hissing sound ofs; and pronounce the t very strongly. 

soixantieme, sixtieth. 

soixante et unieme, sixty-first. 

soixante -deuxieme, sixty-second. 

soixante-troisieroe, sixty-third. 

soixante-quatrieme, sixty-fourth. 

soixante-cinquieme, sixty -fifth. 

soixante-sixieine, sixty-sixth. 

soixante-septieme, sixty-seventh. 

soixante-huitieme, sixty-eighth. 

soixante-neuvieme, sixty -ninth. 

soixante et dixieme, seventieth. 

soixaute-onzieme, seventy-first. 

soixunte-douzieme, seventy-second. 



40 



ELEMENTARY 



soixante treizi&me, 

soixante-quatorzieme, 

soixante-quinzieme, 

soixante-seizieme, 

soixaute-dix-septieme, ((lis) 

soixante-dix-huitieme, (diz) 

soixante-dix-neuvieme, (diz) 

quatre-vin^tieme, 

quatre-yin^-unieme, 

quatre-yingtf-deuxieme, 

quatre-yingtf-troisieme, 

quatre-yin^-quatrieme, 

quatre-yingtf-cinquieme, 

quatre-vingtf-sixieme, 

quatre-viDgtf-septieme, 

quatre-ymg^-huitieme, 

quatre-yiru^-neuvieme, 

quatre-vmgtf-dixieme, 

quatre-yin^-onzienie, 

quatre-yin^-douzienie, 

quatre-ymg^-treizieme, 

quatre-yingtf-quatorzieme, 

quatre-yin^-quinzieine, 

quatre-vin^-seizieme, 

quatre-vin^-dix-septieme, (dis) 

quatre-yin<^-dix-kuitieme ; (diz) 

quatre-yim^-dix-neuvieme ; (diz) 

centieme, 

cen^ uni&me, 

cent deuxienie, 

cent troisieme, 

cent quatrieme, 

cent cinqui^me, 

millieme, 

millionieme, 



seventy-third. 

seventy -fourth. 

seventy-fifth. 

seventy-sixth. 

seventy-seventh. 

seventy-eighth. 

seventy-ninth. 

eightieth. 

eighty-first. 

eighty -second. 

eighty-third. 

eighty-fourth. m 

eighty fifth. 

eighty-sixth. 

eighty-seventh. 

eighty-eighth. 

eighty-ninth. 

ninetieth. 

ninety-first. 

ninety-second. 

ninety-third. 

ninety -fourth. 

ninety-fifth. 

ninety-sixth. 

ninety-seventh. 

ninety -eighth. 

ninety-ninth. 

one hundredth. 

one hundred and first. 

one hundred and second. 

one hundred and third. 

one hundred and fourth. 

one hundred and fifth, <Scc 

thousandth. 

millionth. 



FRENCH EXERCISES 41 

Exercise 28. 

N.B. The numbers cannot be reversed. Five and twenty njmst be translated 
into French by vingt-cinq, twenty-five. 

Send me four and twenty oranges and six pine-apples. Give me 
twelve lemons. Here are (voici) five hundred pens. The second 
son. Six and thirty trees. The sixth day. Send me sixteen fans 
and eighteen hats. Three hundred and sixty-five days and six 
hours. The eleventh hour of the day. Four and twenty hours. 
Of the eleventh month. The first star. Eighty bolts. Eighty- 
eight nails. The first cent. 

§ 19. — In mentioning the days of the month, the cardinal, 
instead of the ordinal, numbers are used ; as, le deux, le trois, 
le vingt et tin de Janvier, the second, third, twenty-first of 
January. Except the^zr^ of the month, which is le premier 
du mois. 

Also, in" speaking of the titles of kings, the cardinal, instead 
of the ordinal, numbers are used ; as, Louis Onze, Louis the 
Eleventh; and the adjective is placed after the noun. 

Except the first and second, which are premier and se- 
cond; as, George the First, George Premier; William the Se- 
cond, Guillaume Second. 



Vocabulary. 



January, Janvier. 
February, Fevrier. 
March, Mars. 
April, Avril. 
May, Mai. 
June, Juin. 



July, Juillet. 
August, Aout. 
September, Septembre. 
October, Octobre. 
November, Nbvembre. 
December, Decembre. 



Remark. — There are three modes of writing the day of the 

month, viz.: Le ler de Juillet, the first of. July. 

Le ler Juillet, " 

ler Juillet, u 

And for letters, Ce ler de Juillet, is sometimes used. 

4* 



42 



ELEMENTARY 



Exercise 29. 

Write in words, The first of July, 1837. February 22nd, 1732 
January 1st, 1800. George the Fourth. William the First. The 
fourth of July, 1776. The eleventh of November, 1111. Decem- 
ber 31st, 1847. The twenty-first of July, 1812. Edward the 
Sixth. Louis the Sixteenth. Henry the Eighth. April 1st, 1212. 
The second of June, 1536. The first of August, 1848. Edward 
the First. George the Second. George the Third. 



Nombres Cardinaux em- 
ployes SLYeofois. 

une fois, 
deux fois, 
trois fois, 
quatre fois, 
cin^ fois, 
six fois, 
sept fois, 
hmt fois, 
neu/ fois, 
dix fois, 
onze fois, 
douze fois, 
treize fois, 
quatorze fois, 
quinze fois, 
seize /ois, 
dix-sept fois, (dis) 
dix-hui^ fois, (diz) 
dix-neu/ fois, (diz) 
\\\\f/t fois, 
viiu/t et une fois, 
vinyt-deux fois, &c 



Cardinal Numbers used 
with the word time. 

once. 

twice, 

thrice or three times. 

four times. 

five times. 

six times. 

seven times. 

eight times. 

nine times. 

ten times. 

eleven times. 

twelve times. • 

thirteen times. 

fourteen times. 

fifteen times. 

sixteen times. 

seventeen times. 

eighteen times. 

nineteen times. 

twenty times. 

twenty-one times. 

twenty-two times, dbc 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 



43 



CHAPTER IV. 

ON THE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 

§ 20. — The pronominal adjectives form a link between ad- 
jectives and pronouns. By some grammarians they are classed 
among the former, and by others among the latter. They are 
divided into three classes, viz., the possessive, the demonstra- 
tive, and the indefinite. 



SECT. I. THE POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 

§ 21. — The possessive adjectives are these, viz. ; 

Before any Before a femi- Before a femi- Before all 

masculine nine noun, nine noun, nouns in the 

noun, singular sing., beginning sing., beginning plural number, 
number. 



My, 

Thy, 
His, 
Her, 
Its, 

Our, 

Your, 

Their, 



mon, 
ton, 
son, 
son, 



noire, 
voire, 
four. 



with a 


conso- 


with a vowel 




nant or 


h 


aspi- 


or h mute. 




rated. 










ma, 






mon, 


ones 


ta, 






ton, 


tes, 


sa, 






son, 


ses, 


sa, 






■son, 


ses, 


sa, 






son, 


ses, 


noire, 






noire, 


. nos, 


voire, 






voire, 


vos, 


four, 






four, 


four 



§ 22. — These adjectives do not agree in gender and number 
with the antecedent, or possessor, as in English, but with the 
thing possessed. This is one of the difficulties of the young 
student, who frequently errs in supposing that his is always to 



44 ELEMENTARY 

be translated by son, her by sa, &c. He must constantly have 
in mind the following rule, which serves for the demonstrative 
and the indefinite adjectives as well as the possessive. 

Rule. — Every pronominal adjective must agree in 
number and gender with some following noun to which 
it refers. 

Exercize 29. 

My son, my child, my daughter, my school. Their work. His 
brother, her brother, his brothers, her brothers. His sister, her 
sister, his sisters, her sisters. His height, her height, its height. 
To thy ear. My brother's birds. The bones of your arm. Our 
jewels. Thy honor. His soul. Her faithful dog. Her eyes are 
black. (Write, She has the eyes black.) His history. Her history. 
The price of your fan. My playthings. I have written twice to 
thy sister. Read your lessons four times. Her hands are white. 
(Write, she has the hands white.) 

§ 23. — The possessive adjective, like the article, must be 
repeated in French before every noun in the sentence before 
which it is understood, but not expressed in English ; as, My 
father and mother, Mon pert et ma mere. 

The prepositions a and de must also be expressed before the 
possessive adjective, when they are understood. 

Vocabulary. 



Aunt, 


tante, f. 


Fruit, 


fruity m. 


Boot, 


botte, f. 


Love, (noun,) 


amour, m. 


Carriage, 


voiture, f. 


Parent, 


parent, m. 


Chair, 


chaise, f. 


Pear, 


poire, f. 


Cherry, 


cerise, f. 


Purse, 


bourse , f. 


Coach, 


carrosse, m 


Raspberry, 


framboise, f. 


Color, 


couleuTj f. 


Service, 


service, m. 


Currant, 


groseille, f. 


Thimble, 


d6, m. 


Flower, 


/I cur, f. 


Uncle, 


oncle, m. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 45 

Exercise 30 

Thy pen and books. Give me your gloves and hat. The love 
of my brother and sister. To your sons and daughters. Its beauty 
and value. My hat, coat, and boots are on (&ur) my chair. Our 
carriage and horses are at (d) your service. Their uncle and aunt 
are happy. Our apples are better than your oranges. Thy hands 
and feet. My pens and ink. The price of his cows and horses. 
Her modesty and prudence. Send (envoie) some fruits and flowers 
to thy mother and sisters. My brother Edward is my father's fifth 
son. Henry the fourth. 

Exercise 31. 

Edward and his sister are careful and attentive. Peter has no 
raspberries in< his garden. George's friend has two grey horses. 
The eleventh of the first month. The vessel has lost its rudder. 
My brothers have eighty sheep and eighty-six cows. One hundred 
and twenty chairs. Two hundred and nineteen cents. Lucy laughs 
less than her sisters. The nights are now (a present) shorter than 
the days. Our brothers and sisters are ready. The price of your 
boots and shoes. Do you love red currants better than white cur- 
rants? Matilda's silk hat is on the round table. 

Exercise 32. 

The color of your currants and cherries is beautiful. My dear 
friends, all the fruits of my garden arc at your service. Send the 
prettiest flowers to your uncle and aunt. Emily's parents are pleased 
with (de) their good daughter. Give me your ripest pears. Ste- 
phen and William have my poor dog. The king's coach is at the 
door of his palace. The garden has lost its beauty. My raspberries 
and currants are the finest. The rose is the queen of flowers. Send 
some fragrant flowers to the blind children. The weight of its fruits 
The old woman has cloth shoes. 



46 ELEMENTARY 

SECT. II. THE DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES. 

§ 24. — This, that, these, those, when followed imme- 
diately by a noun, (or with only an adjective coming 
between them,) are demonstrative adjectives, and are 
translated into French thus : 

Before a noun of the Before a noun of the Before any noun 





masculine 


gend< 


*, 


masculine 


gender, 


of the feminine 




beginning 


with 


a 


beginning 


with a 


gender. 




consonant 


or h 


as- 


vowel or h 


mute. 






pirate. 












This, 


ce, 






cet, 




cette. 


That, 


ce, 






cet, 




ceite. 


These, 


ces, 






ces, 




ces. 


Those, 


ces, 






ces, 




ces. 



Exercise 33. 

This horse, that horse, these horses, those horses. The honor 
of that man. This woman's cows. The modesty of that girl. This 
boy's parents. The voices of those birds. That coat. That star. 
Send those lemons and pine-apples* to my house, and those grapes 
and peaches to your sisters. The son of that hero. What (Quel) 
is the price of those fans and gloves ? Send these corals and crys- 
tals to your brother. The truth of that history. * At (a) this hour. 
Put those pears on the table, and bring some silver knives. 

* The remark § 23 respecting the repetition of the possessive adjec- • 
tive, is equally applicable to the demonstrative adjective. 

§ 25. — As ce, cet, cette, ces, do not express the distinction 
implied in the English words this and that, these and those, 
it is necessary, when we wish to make this distinction, or to 
speak emphatically, to place ci after the noun to denote the 
nearest object, and la, to denote the most remote. 

The particles ci, here, la, there, must be joined by a hyphen 
to the nouns which they follow, thus, 

This horse, re cheval-ci ; that horse, ce cheval-ld. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 



47 



Exercise 34. 

This pen is good. That pen is bad. Give that orange to your 
mother. These fine apples grew (croissaienf) on those trees. Those 
strawberries. These cherries. The price of those plums and these 
pears. My dear sister, read this book ; put that book on the table. 
This ink is black, that ink is blue. These boots are new; give me 
those boots. Send these lilies to Mary, and those violets to Lucy. 
My aunt's eyes are blue. The 29th of February will be her birth- 
day, (jour de naissance^) 





Vocabulary. 




Advantage, 


avantage^ m. 


Mahogany, 


acajou , m. 


Apron, 


tablier, m. 


Marble, 


marbre, m. 


Baker, 


boulanger, m. 


Oak, 


chene, m. 


Cap, 


bonnet, m. 


Physician, 


medecin, m. 


Carpenter, 


charpentier, m. 


Pleasure, 


plaisir, m. 


Farmer, 


fermier, m. 


Season, 


saison, f. 


Handkerchief, 


mouchoir, m. 


Shoemaker, 


cordonnier, m 


Iron, 


fer, m. 


Steel, 


acier, m. 


Leaf, 


feuille, f. 


Velvet, 


velours, m. 


Leather, 


cuir y m. 


Watch, 


montre, f. 




Exerci 


'se 35. 





These knives are of steel, those knives are of silver."^ That farm- 
er has lazy children. This watch is better than that watch. Emily 
has lost her gold thimble. Give this cap to your aunt, and that 
apron to your sister. That physician has a marble house. The 
carpenter has our wooden mallet. Bring those peaches ; these 
peaches are not ripe. The color of these pinks, and the perfume of 
those roses. Julia has a white silk hat. My watch aud handker- 
chief are on that table. Silver is white. That carpenter has a lea- 
ther apron and iron nails. Matilda has your gold watch. 



48 ELEMENTARY 

SECT. III. THE INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. 

§ 26. — The indefinite adjectives always relate to 
a noun or pronoun expressed in the same sentence. 
They are. 



Any, 
All, 


Masc. sing. 

quelque, 

tout, 


Fem. sing. 

quelque, 

toute, 


Masc. plur. 

quelques, 

tous, 


Fem. plur. 

quelques. 

toutes. 


Each, 
Every, 


chaque, 
( chaque, 
\ tout, 


chaque, 
chaque, 
toute, 


tous, 


toutes. 


No, 


aucurij 


aucune, 


aucuns, 


aucunes.* 


No, 


nul, 


nulle, 


nuls, 


nulles* 


Other, 


autre, 


autre, 


autres, 


autres. 


Same, 


meme, 


meme, 


memes, 


memes. 


Some, 
Such, 


quelque, 
tel, 


quelque, 
telle, 


quelques, 
tels, 


quelques. 
telles. 


Several, 






plusieurs, 


plusieurs. 


What, 
Which, 


quel, 
quel, 


quelle, 
quelle, 


quels, 
quels, 


quelles. 
quelles. 



* Used with nouns which have no singular form. 

Remark 1. — Some and any are translated by quelque, 
quelques, only when the idea of one out of several, or a few 
out of a large number, is intended to be conveyed. 

Remark 2. — Chaque must never be used unless followed 
by a noun. 

Remark 3. — Jlucun and nul require ne to be inserted im- 
mediately before the verb to complete the negation; thus, Au- 
cune saison ne vous plait, No season pleases you. 

Exercise 36. 

What beauty? Which boys! What beautiful roses! Each leaf. 
Which tree? Which apple? Which orange? At (A) what hour? 
What lossona have you? Every pleasure. Which flowers will you 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 49 

Lave? To what school? No other woman. The same gloves. 
Some time. Some hours. Several playthings. Each boy. Every 
star. All the games. All the walnuts. Which bird? In (dans) 
what place? Such a (write a such) man. What works! Each 
pebble. Every crystal. All the days. All the nights. Several 
countries. The same wind. The same silk. 



JL 



.Exercise 37. 4W. -**- »-** * & * 



Dish, 


plat, m. 


Dollar, 


gourde, f. 


Fork, 


fourchette, f. 


Money, 


argent, m. 



Sugar is sweet. Gold is yellow. Will *you have some steel pens ? 
This velvet is thicker than that velvet. These bolts are of iron, 
those bolts are of steel. Send my old shoes to that shoemaker. 
This table is of oak ; that table is of mahogany. The beauty of its 
flowers. The trees have lost their leaves. The farmer's house is of 
wood. He has a cloth cap. Will you have those rings and bolts? 
Our baker makes good bread. Send those caps and handkerchiefs 
to the baker's daughter. What is the price of that marble table? 
What advantages have you ? ^/~ 

Vocabulary. 

Needle, aiguille, f. 

Pin, ipingle, f. 

Plate, assiette, f. 

Spoon, cueiller, f. 

Exercise 38. 

Each season has its pleasures. I wish to buy (acheter) an orange ; 
have you any cents to lend me (a me preter) ? Which watch have 
you? I have my silver watch. Some boys are in the garden; they 
are picking (cueillent) the cherries. Our country has its advantages, 
and other countries have their advantages. These forks are larger 
than those forks. Have you any money ? I have some dollars in 
my purse. Will you have a steel ring or an iron ring? These pins 
and needles are good. Some fine days. 

Note. — The possessive pronouns and demonstrative pronouns are 
placed next in order, in preference to the personal pronouns, that the 
pupil may be led to compare them with the possessive adjectives, ano 
demonstrative adjectives, explained in this chapter. By carefully no- 
ticing the difference between them, he will avoid making many mis- 
takes into which young students often fall. 



50 



ELEMENTARY 



CHAPTER V. 



THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 



§ 27. — Mine, thine, his, hers, its, ours, yours, and theirs 
are not cabled, in English grammars, possessive pronouns ; they 
are the possessive ease of the personal pronouns /, thou, he, 
she, and it. But the French words by which they are translated 
are called possessive pronouns ; they cannot be used without 
the article prefixed to them ; they are never followed by a noun, 
but must agree in gender and number with the nouns which 
they represent. 



Mine, 

Thine, 

His, 

Hers, 

Its, 

Ours, 

Yours, 

Theirs, 



Masc. sing. 
le mien, 
le tien, 
le sien, 
le sien, 
le sien, 
le notre, 
le votre, 
le leur, 



Fem. sing. 
la mienne, 
la tienne, 
la sienne, ' 
la sienne, 
la sienne, 
la notre, 
la votre, 
la lexer, 



Masc. plur. 
les miens, 
les iiens, 
les siens, 
les siens, 
les siens, 
les ?wtrcs, 
les votres, 
les lears, 



Fem. plur. 
les miennes. 
les tiennes. 
les siennes. 
les siennes. 
les siennes. 
les notres. 
les votres. 
les leurs. 



Remark. — In the following exercises the possessive adjectives 
and possessive pronouns are combined in the same sentence. The 
pupil will translate "My book and thine/' thus; Mon livre et le 
tien; omitting the words "meaning thy book;" and as he proceeds 
in translating the Exercise, he will perceive the superior accuracy 
of the French language in these expressions. In the English sen- 
tence, "My hoolc and thine/' the word thine does not indicate whether 
one book is intended, or more than one; but in the French sentence, 
"mon livre et le tien," U iicn shows that only one book is meant. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 

Exercise 39. 



51 



My book and thine, 
My pen and thine, 
My books and thine, 
My pens and thine, 
My horse and thine, 
My cow and thine, 
Thy dog and mine, 
Thy sister and mine, 
Thy brothers and mine, 
Thy flowers and mine, 
Thy dog and mine, 
Thy dogs and. mine, 
Thy sister and mine, 
Thy sisters and mine, 
His father and hers, 
Her father and his, 
His mother and hers. 
Her mother and his, 
His son and hers, 
Her sons and his, 
His daughter and hers, 
Her daughters and his, 
His dog and theirs, 
His house and theirs, 
His coat and theirs, 



His apple and theirs, 
Their friend and his, 
Their friends and hers, 
Their table and his, 
Their tables and hers, 
Its weight and theirs, 
Its beauty and theirs, 



meaning thy book. 

u thy fen. 

" thy boohs. 

6C tliy pens. 

u thy horses. 

u thy cows. 

U my dog. 

u my sister. 

tc my brothers. 

u my flowers. 

11 my clogs. 

il my dog. 

" my sisters. 

u my sister. 

u her father. 

u his father. 

u her mother. 

" his mother. 

u her sons. 

u his son. 

cc her daughters 

u his daughter. 

u their dog. 

iC their house. 

11 their coats. 



Exercise- 40. 



meaning their apples. 

" his friends. 

" her friend. 

c( his table. 

" her tables. 

" their weight. 

" their beauty 



52 

Its fruits and theirs, 
Its colors and theirs, 
Our king and yours, 
Our queen and yours, 
Our pencils and yours, 
Our pens and yours, 
Our knife and yours, 
Our house and yours, 
Our birds and yours, 
Our flowers and yours, 
Your child and ours, 
Your sister and ours, 
Your sons and ours, 
Your daughters and ours, 
Your hats and ours, 
Your purses and ours, 
Your aunt and ours, 
Your uncle and ours, 



ELEMENTARY 




meaning 


their fruits. 


u 


their colors 


cc 


your king. 


cc 


your queen. 


cc 


your pencil. 


cc 


your pen. 


cc 


your knives. 


it 


your houses. 


CC 


your birds. 


cc 


your flowers. 


cc 


our child. 


cc 


our sister. 


cc 


our son. 


cc 


our daughter. 


cc 


our hats. 


cc 


our purses. 


cc 


our aunts. 


cc 


our uncles. 



§ 28. — When the possessive pronoun is preceded by the pre- 
position de or a, the article must be contracted, as it is before 
a noun ; as, Of thy book and mine, de ton livre et du mien. 
To your father and ours, a votre pere et au ndtre. 

To make this more intelligible to the young pupil, one of the 
possessive pronouns is here declined. 



Masc. 


C5XIN U U UAJX. 

Fem. 




le mien, 


la mienne, 


mine. 


du mien, 


de la mienne, 


of mine. 


au mien, 


h la mienne, 

PLURAL. 


to mine. 


les miens, 


les miennes, 


mine. 


des miens, 


des miennes, 


of mine 


aux miens, 


aux miennes, 


to mine. 



TRENCH EXERCISES. 



53 



Exercise 41. 

• The pupil will write the pronouns le tier* le sien, le noire, 
&c, declining them in gender and number Ike le mien. 



Vocabulary. 



Ancestor, 
Cambric, 


aieul, m. 
batiste, f. 


Map, 

Master, 


Carpet, 

Copy-book, 

Desk, 

Exercise, 

Friend, 


tapis, m. 
cahier, m. 
pupitre, m. 
theme, m. 
amie, f. 


Muslin, 

Paper, 

Penknife, 

Pupil, 

Scholar, 


Gown, 

Key, 

Market, 


robe, f. 
clef, f . 
mar die, m. 

Exerci 


Translation, 
Writing, 
se 42. 



carte, f. 

maitre, m. 

mousseline, f. 

jpapier, m. 

canif, m. 

el eve, m. 

ecolier, m. 
( traduction, f. 
( version, f. 

ecriture^ f. 



You have the copy books of your brother and of mine. Send 
some flowers to your mother and mine, and some fruit to your father 
and mine. Bring some ink to your sister and ours. The price of 
our birds and yours. The beauty of my flowers, and the value of 
theirs. The color of my roses is more beautiful than the color of 
thine. Her lilies are white, ours are red, what {quelle) is the color 
of yours ? The history of his ancestors and hers. Our strawber- 
ries are not so large as yours. Of thy pupil and mine. The color 
of my paper and of his. 

Exercise 43. 

Send some currants, raspberries and cherries to my brothers and 
to yours. I was writing to my aunt on my birth day, the 11th of 
February. My sister has seen the queen twice, three times, four 
times. William's penknife is larger than mine. Put the plates, 
knives, and forks, and some bread and butter on the table. His 
work is better than yours. Her cap, apron, and handkerchief are on 
the chair. William the Third. Mary's mother has my key. What 
fine currants ! My uncle's house is white. Your carpet is hand- 
somer than ours. 

5 * 



54 ELEMENTARY 



CHAPTER VI. 

/ 

THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

§ 29. — This, that, these, those, when not followed by 
a noun to which they refer, are demonstrative pro- 
nouns, and are thus translated into French : 

This ) f 

_ 7 ; >- standing for a noun of the masculine gender, is \ celui. 

That, ) I 

This ) ( 

> standing for a noun of the feminine gender, is -J celle. 

JL /ICCt, J \ 

' 1 f 

' > standing for a noun of the masculine gender, is < ceux. 
standing for a noun of the feminine gender, is < celles. 



These, 
Those 



These, 
Those, 



!when the word to which it refers has not been 
expressed, or when we speak of something in 
an indefinite manner, is 

That, \ do. do. do 




ce 



(1.) Celui, celle, ceux, celles, must always have an ante- 
cedent, and must be followed by a preposition or a relative 
pronoun. 

(2.) Ceci, cela, stand for the word thing understood, but 
have no antecedent unless it be a phrase. They allude to 
things mentioned in a vague or indefinite manner. They are 
never followed by a preposition or a relative pronoun. 

(3.) Ce, (demonstrative pronoun,) is never used, unless it *s 
followed by the relative pronoun qui, que, dont, &c, *>r is the 
subject of some tense of the verb ctre. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 55 

Examples. 

My glove and that of my friend 
Mon gant-et CELUI de mon ami. 

Do this; do not do that. 

Faites CECi; ne faites pas CELA. 

That is not my fault. 
Ce n' est pas ma faute. 

Rule. — The demonstrative pronouns, celui, celle, ceux, 
celles, must agree in gender and number with the 
noun which they represent. 

Exercise 44. 

The house of my brother and that of my sister. The farmer's 
horse and that of the baker. I have lost my jewels and those of 
my friend. His dog has torn (dechire) my gown and that of my 
aunt. Give me that. This is not so good as that. He has lost all 
his spoons and those of his mother. The general's coach is green, 
that of the king is yellow. Send me your pens, and those of your 
little sister. My books are not so good as those of my brother. 
Your horse is black, that of your father is grey. That is very pretty. 
Give this to the children. 

Exercise 45. 

Your writing is better than that of your brother. Thy desk and 
that of thy friend. Read that; do not read this. Do you wish the 
cambric handkerchief or the silk handkerchief? That is my pen- 
knife. Give these keys and those of our house to my uncle. Send 
that muslin gown to Mary; she has torn her silk gown. These 
dishes and those of thy aunt. William has lost all his money and 
that of his brother. That will be your fault {faute). Our silver 
forks are not so large as those of your sister. This is better than 
that. Steel is grey. 



56 ELEMENTARY 

§ 30. — In order to make a distinction between this and that, 
these and those, in French, the adverbs ci, here, and Id, there, 
are added to the pronouns celui, cellq, ceux y celles, and joined 
to them by a hyphen, thus : 

Masc. sing. Fem. sing. 

This, or this one, celui-ci, celle-ci. 

That, or that one, celui-ld, celle-ld. 

Masc. plur. Fem. plur. 

These, or these ones, ceux-ci, celles-ci. 

Those, or those ones, ceux-ld, celles-ld. 

Exercise 46. 

This ink is better than that. Those horses are handsomer than 
these. I prefer (jprefere) these apples to those oranges. This cap 
is not so white as that. Will you have these pencils or those ? 
These plums are not so large as those. I prefer this carpet to that 
one. You have torn this cloak, give me that. I have lost your 
gloves, take (prenez) these. This translation is better than that one. 
Leave (laissez) these pens, and take those. Take that paper, but 
(mais) leave this. This lesson is as long as that. That exercise is 
more difficult than this one. 

Remarks — The particles ci, Id, being added merely to make 
a distinction between objects, if the demonstrative pronoun is 
followed by a relative pronoun, or by a noun in the possessive 
case, the distinction is sufficiently clear, these particles would 
be useless, and must be omitted. 

Exercise 47. 
These maps are not so handsome as those which (que) we have. 
Take these penknives, leave that one in my desk. These trees are 
finer than those which (qui) are in our garden. I prefer those copy- 
books to these. Give me your translation and that of the new scho- 
lar. My pupils and those of my friend. That watch is better than 
this. Leave these crystals, and give those to the boys. lie has the 
farmer's sheep and those of his neighbor. My nephew has given to 
the master his exercises and those of the other scholars. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 



57 



§ 31. — The demonstrative pronoun is often suppressed in 
English, and supplied by an apostrophe and an s added to the 
noun ; but it must be expressed in French by celui, celle, ceax, 
or celles, according to the gender and number of the noun to 
which it refers ; as, My hat and my brother's, Mori chapeau 
et cehd de mon frere, which is, literally, My hat and that of 
my brother. 

Exercise 48. 

You have torn my gown and my sister's. My bird is not so largo 
(grand) as my brother's. Take your cloak and your brother's, but 
leave mine and my friend's. I have lost my pencils and my sister's. 
Your house is larger than your brother's. Bring me (moi) your 
pens and take your sister's. Send my books and my brother's to 
the school. My gloves are yellow, my sister's are white, my cousin's 
are black. The farmer's horses are stronger than the physician's. 
Our silver forks are at your service; my brother's are of steel. 
Emily's translation is better than her sister's. 

Vocabulary. 



.Bookseller, 


libraire, m. 


Niece, 


niece, f. 


Cake, 


gateau, m. 


Piece, bit, 


morceauj m. 


Cousin, 


cousin, m. 


King, 


bague, f. 


Cousin, 


cousine, f. 


Saucer, 


soucoupe, f. 


Cheese, 


frontage, m. 


Shutter, 


volet, m. 


Cup, 


tasse, f. 


Slate, 


ardoise, f. 


Glass, 


verre, m. 


Stone, 


pierre, f. 


Lawyer, 


avocat, m. 

Ex era 


Thread, 
se 49. 


fit, m. 


Eat this cake and take (portez) 


that one to John. 


Will you have 



my carriage or my cousin's ? Take away (emportez) my plate and 
leave my sister's on the table. Send your boots and mine to the 
shoemaker. I have lost my needles and Mary's* Our baker makes 
better bread than yours. The farmer will have cabbages. The 
carpenters will have nails. Our poor neighbor has no wood. Send 
him {envoy ez-lui) my money and my niece's, and your coat and my 
nephew's. The school is in the stone house. 



58 



ELEMENTARY 



§ 32. — He, she, and they, the one, the ones, when followed 
by ivho, whom, or that, are translated into French by the de- 
monstrative pronouns celui, celle, ceux, or celles, thus : 



He who, celui qui. 

She who, celle qui. 

They who, (masc.) ceux qui. 

They who, (fem.) celles qui. 

The one who, (masc.) celui qui. 

The one who, (fem.) celle qui. 

The ones who, (masc.) ceux qui. 

The ones who, (fem.) celles qui. 



He whom, celui que. 

She whom, celle que. 

They whom, (masc.) ceux que. 

They whom, (fem.) celles que. 

The one whom, (masc.) celui que. 

The one whom, (fem.) celle que. 

The ones whom, (mas.) ceux que. 

The ones whom, (fem.) celles que. 



N.B. "When which or that, follows the one, the ones, &c, it is to be translated 
by qui, if it is the subject or nominative of the following verb; but by que, if it 
is the object of the verb. 

Exercise 50. 

He who dines [dine) with us is my cousin's best friend. She 
who is virtuous is happy. They who are lazy are unhappy. They 
who are quick are not always (toujours) attentive. She whom we 
love is amiable. He whom we adore (adorons) is almighty (tout- 
puissant). My hat is not so new as the one that you have. Your 
slate is better than the one that I have. These pine-apples are finer 
than the ones which you have bought (achetes.) I prefer these 
strawberries to the ones in the (du) market. 

Remarlc. — The remark made on page 30 respecting the use and 
place of nouns employed as adjectives, to denote the material of 
which any thing is made, is applicable also to nouns used to describe 
the one, the ones; as, Will you have the silver thimble or the gold 
one? Voulez-vous le de d' argent, ou celui d'or? 

But if the word that describes the one, the ones, is an adjective, 
and not a noun used as an adjective, the words one, ones, are not 
translated into French; as, Do you wish the white handkerchief, or 
the red one? Voulez-vous le mouchoir hlanc, ou le rouge? 

Exercise 51. 

Give me the silver watch, and send the gold one to my friend. 
What knives have you? AVe have the steel ones. Will you have 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 59 

the glass dish or the silver one? I prefer the oak chairs to the ma- 
hogany ones. Have you the old coat or the new one ? Give me 
my silk gown. Do you wish the blue one, or the black one? Send 
the cloth cloak to John ; and the silk one to his sister. What horses 
have you? I have the grey ones, and your nephew has the black 
one. I prefer this steel pen to the gold one. What apples do you 
wish? Give me the ripest ones. 

§ 33. — The former is translated by 

celiri-ld, when it refers to a noun masculine, singular number. 

celle-Id, " " feminine, " 

ceux-ld, u " masculine, plural number. 

celles-Id, u u feminine, " 

The latter is translated by 

celui-ci, when it refers to a noun masculine, singular number, 
celle-ci, " " feminine, " 

ceax-ci, " " masculine, plural number. 

celles-ci, m u u feminine, " 

Exercise 52. 

John and William are my youngest pupils; the former is amiablo 
and studious, the latter is lazy and deceitful. Mary and Lucy are 
my friends; the former is frank, the latter is sweet-tempered {douce.') 
You have white roses and red roses; I prefer the former. I have a 
grey horse and a black horse; take the former, and send the latter 
to my brother. Bring me some peaches and plums, the former are 
better than the latter. Your garden has some advantages that mine 
has not. These slates are larger than those. You ou^bi. (devriez) 
to make a better translation than that. 



t>0 



ELEMENTARY 



CHAPTER VII. 



THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 



SECT. L PERSONAL PRONOUNS IN THE NOMINATIVE CASE. 

§ 34. — The personal pronouns in the nominative 
case, are expressed in French thus : 

I, je, moi. 

Thou, tu y toi. 

He, ilj lui. 

She, elle. 

It, ilf elle. 

We, nous. 

You, vous. 

mi ") when the French word for which it ' 
) stands is masculine, is 



mi 1 standing for a noun of the feminine f 
^ j gender, is ( 



■ife, eux. 

elles. 



RemarJc 1. — As there is no neuter, gender in the French language, 
there is no word corresponding to our English pronoun it, which 
must be translated by il, he, elle, she, &c. 

-r, ) when it is the subject or nominative of a verb, and the ( ., 
; j French word for which it stands is masculine, is ( 

when it is the subject or nominative of a verb, and the 
French word for which it stands is feminine, is 



it, J 

«-. 1 used in an impersonal sense, that is, without refer- J ., 
; J ence to any substantive mentioned before, is ( 



or ce. 



Examples. 



Head this book; IT is interesting. 
Lend me this pen ; it is good. 

It rains. 

It is noble to forget one's self. 

He wastes his time; it is a pity. 



Lisez ce livre; EL est intc'rcssant. 
Pretcz-moi cettc plume ; ELLE est 

bonne. 
Il plcut. 

Tl est Iran de soublicr. 
Ilperdson temps; c' 'est dommagc 



FRENCH EXERCISES 61 

Remark 2. — It is expressed by ce, before any tense of the verb 
etre, to be, when that verb is followed by a substantive or a pronoun ; 
as, It is my son, C'est monfils; It is I, C'est moi. 

Remark 3. — He, she, and they, before the verb to be, followed by 
n substantive, are generally expressed by ce; as, He is my nephew, 
C'est mon neveu. 

Remark 4. — He, she, and they, when followed by who, whom, or 
that, are translated by celui, celle, ceux, or celles, as has been explained 
§32. 

§ 35. — The student must bear in mind that when 
a French pronoun has two forms, (as je and moi for 
J ; ) these forms are not to be used indifferently, but 
according to the following directions. 

§ 36. — When I, thou, he, or they, is the subject nominative 
of a verb, and precedes the verb in a sentence which is not 
interrogative, or follows it in an interrogative sentence, 

I is translated by je. 

Thou « « tu. 

culine noun, by 

§ 37. — But in exclamations, or after the words, " it is, it 
was" &c, or in connection with another pronoun, or where 
a distinction is intended between persons, or after than or a% 
in a comparison of equality, superiority, or inferiority, or in 
reply to a question, the verb being omitted, or, when sep- 
arated from the verb of which it is the subject by any word 
except the personal pronoun, which is the object of the verb, 
or by the adverb of negation, 



He, is translated by il. 

Theu,\ sla f ias{ov \ m ™-\ih. 

01 I culine noun, by > 



J is translated by 


moi. 


He, is translated 1 y 


lui. 


Thou « « 


toi. 


They, masc, « 


eux 




Examples. 




I ! go to the city ? 


Moi! aller d la vUlef 




It is I. 


(Jest moi. 




I who love. 




Moi qui aime. 





62 ELEMENTARY 

He and I are going to the city. Lui et moi nous aUons & la ville. 

Richer than I. Plus ricloe que moi. 

Who calls Mary ? I. Qui appelle Marie f Moi. 

I surely will remain faithful to Moi, a coup stir, te resterai 

thee. fidele. 

He alone knows my secrets. Lui seui connait mes secrets. 

Vocabulary. 



Country, 


campagne. 


f. 


Street, 


rue ', f. 


Fast, adv., 


vite, 




To-day, 


aujouroVhui. 


Friendship, 


amitie, f. 




To-morrow, 


demain. 


Here, 


ici. 




When, 


Quaud. 


if, 


si. 




Where, 


ou. 


Often, adv., 


souvent. 


Exerci 


Yesterday, 
'se 53. 


hier. 



The boys are gathering apples : will they give the apples to the 
poor woman? John is able to read better than they. My sisters 
are here; they are writing to their aunt. It was I. Do you sell 
cream ? I sell milk, but my brother sells cream. I ! drink (inf. 
mood) wine ! Their coach is old; but it is as good as if it were (ind. 
mood imp.) new. It is he. These peaches would be better if they 
were riper. Am I not worthy of Mary's friendship? I, who am 
her sister. It is she. Is it you ? 

Exercise 54. 

Do you come from school ? I ! I have not been at school this 
month. Does he run fast? Does she sew well? He and I, we are 
writing to John. I, who go so (st) often to the city, I prefer the 
country. Mary is more studious than thou. I ! eat (inf. mood) thy 
apples? Happier than he. I was in the house, and he, he was in 
the street. I have a peach, but it is not ripe. Do you se- j that 
house? it is for sale (d vend re.) He writes better than she As 
well as I. Better than they. It is our neighbor's house. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 63 

Place of the nominative in interrogative sentences. 

§ 38 — (1.) In interrogative sentences, if the subject is & pro- 
noun, it is always placed after the verb ; as, Shall we come 
back to-morrow ? Reviendrons-nous demain ? 

(2.) In interrogative sentences, when a noun is the subject 
nominative of the verb, the noun is placed before the verb, and 
the'pronoun il, elle, Us or elles, according to the gender and 
number of the noun, is placed immediately after the verb ; as, 
Is your father here ? Votre pere est-il ici? Does your sister 
love flowers? Votre sceur aime-t-elle les fleurs? 

(3.) When, in interrogative sentences, the verb which is 
followed by the pronoun il, die, or on, ends with a vowel, the 
letter t, preceded and followed by a hyphen, is placed between 
the verb and the pronoun ; as, Will she return with us ? Re- 
viendra-t-elle avec nous ? 

(4.) If the verb is in one of the compound tenses, the per- 
sonal pronoun should be placed after the auxiliary; as, Has 
your father come ? Votre pere est-il venu ? 

(5.) When, the nominative of the verb being a noun, the 
sentence begins with an interrogative adverb, such as where, 
when, &c, the noun used as a nominative can be placed after 
the verb, as in English ; or before the verb, as directed above, 
(2) with the personal pronoun placed after the verb ; as, 

SQuand viendra votre freref 
or, 
Quand votre fr ere viendra-t-il? 

N. B. The pupil must be careful not to put the interrogative adverb 
between the nominative case and the verb. 



64 ELEMENTARY 

Exercise 55. 

Has "William a knife? Have not my brothers a beautiful dog? 
Does the boy sell apples? Are they ripe? Is your hat worth a 
dollar? Are the children throwing stones? Is Lucy leading the old 
woman ? Is Mary calling her sister ? Is the book on the table ? Is 
the pen good? Were the boys running fast? When will thy father 
come? Where is my cloak? Is my dog in the neighbor's garden? 
Where is my dog? Who (qui) was running after (apres) my uncle's 
horse? It was I. I run faster than he. 

Exercise 56. 

Are the boys eating cherries or currants ? You have fine raspber- 
ries. Has your sister eaten hers? W r hen will thy aunt read that 
book ? She is sick. Send some caps and aprons to Mary's mother, 
the 21st of this month. He and I were running very (bien) fast. 
Richer than he. I prefer these pears to those. Are your horses 
black? These plums are finer than those. Are those apples ripe? 
Where are my sisters? They are with (avec) their sick friend. 
That is my father's lawyer. 

Remarlc. — Not, used with a verb, is expressed in French by pla- 
cing ne before the verb, and pas after it. Ne is written n' before a 
vowel or a silent h. When the verb is in a compound tense, p>as 
must be placed between the auxiliary and the participle. 

Exercise 57. 

Have you not my sister's pencils? Has she not found hers ? The 
men are not gathering the fruit. They will not come often. They 
are not running. Does not Lucy love cherries ? I, I shall not beat 
the dog. The girls do not write fast, but they write well. I, who 
am not her friend. Will not your sister come to-morrow? We are 
not idle. Do not the boys owe much (beau-coup) to their friends ? 
We do not eat pine-apples. Mary is not revengeful. Do not thy 
brothers give their money to the poor (pfar.) ? Do not eat fast. 
Is that table mahogany? 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 65 



SECT. II. PERSONAL PRONOUNS IN THE POSSESSIVE CASE. 

§ 39. — Mine, thine, his, hers, its, ours, yours, theirs, 
which are in English the possessive case of the personal pro- 
nouns, /, thou, he, she and it, have been explained on page 50. 

§ 40. — But when mine, thine, his, &c., are used with the 
verb to be to convey simply an idea of property, 



Mine 


is translated by 


& moi. 


Ours 




is 




& nous. 


Thine 


U 6( 


& toi. 


Yours 




is 




a vous. 


His 


iC (( 


a lid. 


Hers 




is 




& elle. 




Theirs, standing 


for a masculine 


noun, 


is d 


eux. 






Theirs, " 


" fe 


minine 


u 


& 


elles. 





Example. 

Is this pen yours? Cette plume est-elle a vous? 

No, it is not mine. Non, elle rUest pas a moi. (Mean- 

ing simply it does not belong to me.) 

Exercise 58. 

Is that garden yours? No, it belongs (appartient or est) to my 
brother. Give that rose to thy sister. It is not mine. Where are 
my gloves? Those gloves are thine. These jewels are not ours. 
Has Mary a fan ? The fan which is on the table is hers. The boys 
are gathering apples. All the red apples are theirs. Which horse 
belongs to William? The black horse is his. Those knives are 
theirs. Are they not ours? Will you have the gold thimble or the 
silver one? The former is mine; the latter belongs to Emily. Put 
that money in my silk purse. 

6* 



66 ELEMENTARY 

SECT. Ill PERSONAL PRONOUNS IN THE OBJECTIVE CASE. 

§ 41. — The personal pronouns in the objective 
case are expressed in French thus : 



Me, 


me, rnoi } 


Thee, 


te, toi. 


Him, 


le, luL 


Her, 


la, elle. 


It, 


le, la. 


Us, 


nous. 


You, 


vous. 


Them, 


leSj eux, eTles. 



N.B. The pupil must carefully attend to the following directions. 

j- ( when it is the direct object of a verb, and the French word } , 

( for which it stands, is masculine, is ) 

T ( when it is the direct object of a verb, and the French word ) , 

( for which it stands, is feminine, is, ) 

m7 f when the French word for which it stands, f 7 , 

Them < . ,. . < les and eux. 

( is masculine, is . (; 

fj,-, ( when the French word for whic*h it stands, ( -. ;i 77 
\ is feminine, is ( 

Remark. — Him, Tier, and them, when followed by who, idiom, or 
that, are translated by celui, celle, ceux, celles. See § 32. 

§ 42. — Before the pupil can write correctly the French pro- 
nouns in the objective case, he must clearly understand the 
difference between the direct and the indirect object of a verb. 

A pronoun or a noun is the direct object of a verb, when it 
is governed by that verb without the assistance of a preposition, 
expressed or understood; as, I see hi in. 

A pronoun or a noun is the indirect object of a verb when 
the help of a preposition, expressed or understood, is needed to 
complete the sense ; as, / speak to him. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 67 



Personal Pronouns used as direct objects of a verb. 

§ 43. — Me, when it is the direct object of a verb, is me. 

Thee, " " " te. 

Him, " u " le. 

Rev, ■ " " " la. 

It, " and standing for a masculine noun ; le. 

It, a standing for a feminine noun, la. 

Them, les. 

§ 44. — Except, when the verb is in the imperative mood 
used affirmatively, 

Me is translated by moi. 

Thee " " toi. 

N.B. When the verb in the imperative mood is used negatively. 

Me is translated by me. 

Thee " te. 



Personal Pronouns used as indirect objects of a verb. 

N.B. The preposition to is always expressed or understood before 
these pronouns in English, but is not expressed in French except 
after reflected verbs and a few others. 

§45.- 



•To me, 


when it is 


the indirect objed 


t of a ve 


rb, is me. 


To thee, 




a 


a 


cc 


te. 


To him, 




cc 


cc 


cc 


lui. 


To her, 




cc 


cc 


a 


lui. 


To it, 




u 


cc 


CC 


y- 


To MS, 




CC 


CC 


cc 


nous. 


To you, 




c 


cc 


cc 


vous. 


To them, 


(speak : 


ing 


of persons,) 


cc 


leur. 


To them, 


(speaking 


of things,) 


cc 


y- 



68 ELEMENTARY 

§ 46. — Except, when the verb is in the imperative mood 
used affirmatively, 

To me is translated by moi. 

To thee " toi. 

N.B. When the verb in the imperative mood is used negatively, 

To me is translated by me. 

To thee " te. 



Personal Pronouns in the objective case, governed by a 
preposition, and not the object of a verb. 



g jw yr ( when it is governed by a preposition and is 

s ' ; | not the object of a verb, is 



moi. 



Thee, 




u 11 iC 


toi. 


Him, 




tt c (c 


lui. 


Her, 




(( u (( 


elle. 


Them, 


u 


standing for a masculine noun, 


eux. 


Them, 


u 


feminine u 


elles 



Remark. — It is seldom expressed in French after a preposition. 
For example; Do you put your hat on the table, or under it? is 
translated thus: Mettez-vous votrechapeau sur la table oic dessous? 

To it. See § 45. 



§48.-0/, it, from it, 

Of him, from him, 
Of her, from her, 
Of them, from them, 



► are translated by en. 



Remark. — Some and any, when they are not followed by 

a noun, are used like pronouns, and are translated by en, as, 

Give me some, Donnez m'en. 

I have not any, Je n'en ai pas. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 69 

SECT. IV. THE PLACE OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS GOVERNED 

BY VERBS. 

§ 49. — A personal pronoun governed by a verb, either as 
its direct or indirect object, must be placed immediately before 
the verb ; as, 



He sees me, 


H me voit, 


thee, 


. 11 te Yoit, 


us, 


U nous voit, 


you, 


11 vous voit, 


him, 


11 le voit. 


I speak to him, 


Je hi parle, 


to her, 


Je lui parle, 


to them, 


Je leur parJe, 


of it, 


Ten parle, 


of them, 


Ten parle. 


Does he see him or it ? 


Le voit-il? 


her or it ? 


La voit-il ? 


them? 


Les voit-il? 



§ 50. — But when the verb is in the imperative mood used 
affirmatively i the pronoun governed by the verb must be 
placed after it; as, Send him, Envoy ez-le. 

N. B. — When the verb in the imperative mood is used negatively, 
the pronoun governed by a verb must be placed before the verb as in 
§49. 

Examples, 



Send us, 


Envoy ez-nous. 


her, 


Envoy ez- la. 


them, 


Envoy ez-les. 


Speak to him } 


Parlez-/i/i. 


to her, 


Parlez-/wi. 


to them, 


Parlez-feur. 


Do not send us, 


Ne nous envoyez pas, 


him, 


Ne /'envoyez pas. 


them, 


Ne les envoyez pas. 


Do not speak to him } 


Ne lui parlez pas. 


to her, 


Ne lui parlez pas. 


to them, 


Ne leur parlez pas. 



70 



ELEMENTARY 



§ 51. — (1.) When a verb governs two personal pronouns, one 
of which is its direct object, .and the other its indirect object, 
the pronoun in the first or second person is placed before the 
one in the third person ; that is, me, te, se, nous, vous, pre- 
cede le, la, les, y, or en. 

(2.) If both pronouns are in the third person, the direct ob- 
ject is placed before the indirect object ; that is, le, la, les, 
precede lui, leur, y, or en, 

(3.) When y and en occur in the same sentence, y precedes 
en. 

Examples. 



He gave him or it to me, 

He gave her or it to me, 

He gave them to me % 

He gave me some. 

He gave him or it to thee. 

He gave thee some, 

He gave him or it to us, 

He gave her or it to you, 

He gave us some, 

He gave you some, 

He recalls him or it to himself, 

He recalls her or it to herself, 

He recalls them to himself 

He applies himself to it, 

He sent me there, 

He sent him or her to me there, 

He sent me some there, 

He sent us there, 

He sent some to us there, 

He gives it to him or to her, 

He gives it to them, 

He gives them to them, 

He sent them to them there, 

He sent some to him there, 

He sent some there, 

He sent some to them there, 



II me le donna. 
II me la donna, 
II me les donna. 
II mien donna. 
II te le donna. 
II fen donna. 
II nous le donna. 
II vous la donna. 
II no its en donna. 
II vous en donna. 
II se le rappelle. 
II se la rappelle. 
II se les rappelle. 
II s'y applique. 
II m J y envoya.* 
II me Vy envoya. 
II m'y en envoya. 
II nous y envoya. 
II nous y en envoya. 
II le lui donne. 
II le leur donne. 
II les leur donne. 
II les leur y envoya. 
II lui y en envoya. 
II y en envoya. 
II leur y en envoya. 



* En and y are also adverbs of place, en meaning tliaicc, and y, there, thither, 
and they follow the same rules as the pronouns. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 



71 



§ 52. — But, when a verb in the imperative mood, used of- 
firmatively , governs two pronouns, these pronouns are placed 
'after that verb, in the following order : 

Le, la.) les, are placed immediately after the verb. 

Lui, leur, moi, nous, vous, come after le, la, or les. 

Y precedes moi, toi, le, and la. 

Y follows nous, vous, and les. 
En comes the last. 

Examples. 



Send him to me, 
Send her to me, 
Send them to me, 
Send him or it to them, 
Send them to them, 
Send them to him, 
Send me there, 
Send us there. 
Send some there, 
Warn him of it, 
Warn them of it, 
Compel me to it, 
Compel us to it, 
Give me some, 
Give us some, 
Transport yourself there, 
Inform yourself of it, 
Apply yourself to it, 



Envoy ez-le-moi. 
Envoy ez-la-moi. 
Envoy ez-les-moi. 
'Envoy ez-le-leur. 
Envoy ez-les-leur. 
Envoy ez-les-lui. 
Envoy ez-y-moi . 
Envoy ez-nous-y. 
Envoyez-y-en. 
Avertissez-Z'en. 
Avertissez-/es-en. 
Forcez-2/-moi. 
Foicez-nous-y. 
Donnez-m 7 en. 
Donnez-nous-en. 
Tr an sporte z-vo us-y. 
Informez- vows-en. 
Appliquez-i'OHS-2/. 



N. B. When the verb in the imperative mood is used negatively, 
the pronouns governed by the verb must be placed before the verb, 
a? in § 51. 

Do not send him to me, Ne me /'envoyez pas. 

Do not send me any, Ne m'en envoyez pas. 

Do not send us there, Ne nous y envoyez pas. 

Do not give me any, Ne m'en donnez pas. 

Do not give them any, Ne leur en donnez pas. 

Do not warn him of it, Ne Pen avertissez pas. 

Do not warn them of it, ' Ne les en avertissez pas. 



ELEMENTARY 



A TABLE 

Showing at one view the place of Personal Pronouns in the 
objective case. 





Before the verb. 
§43,45.49,51. 


After the verb. 
§ 44, 46, 50, 52. 


After a prepc 
§47. 


Me, 
to Me, 


i 


Me, 


Moi, 


Moi. 


Thee, 
to Thee, 


i 


Te, 


Toi, 


Toi. 


Himself, "\ 
Herself I 
Itself f 
Themselves, J 


Se, 




Soi. 


Us, 
to Vs, 


\ 


Nous, 


Nous, 


Nous. 


You, 
to Yoa, 


\ 


Vous, 


Vous, 


Vous. 


Him, 
It; mas. 


i 


Le, 


Le, 


Lui. 


Her, 

It; fern. 


i 


La, 


La, 


EHe. 


TJcem, 




Les, 


Les, 


(Eux, m. 
}Elles,f. 


to Him, 
to Her, 


i 


Lui, 


Lui. 




to Tliem, 




Leur,^ 


Leur.^ 




of, > It, Him, t 
from, ) Her, TJiem, ) 


En, 


En. 




to It, 
to Them, 


i 


Y, 


Y. 





* The personal pronoun leur, to them, should not be mistaken for 
the possessive pronoun, four, meaning their; the former never takes 
the sign of the plural, while the latter is written fours when it 
agrees with a plural noun. 

§ 53. — If the objective pronouns are governed by a verb 
compounded of the auxiliary verbs avoir or etre and a past 
participle, they must be placed before the auxiliary verb, and 
not between the auxiliary and the participle ; as, 

lie has seen we, 11 iu'a vu. 

He has seen thee, • 11 T'a vu. 

We have seen him. Nous ilavons vu. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 73 

Exercise 59. 

See § 41, 42, 43, 49. 

Do you see John ? I see him. Where is my book ? I do not 
see it. Does he see me ? Does he see thee ? Does he see us ? Does 
he see you? William is at the door; do you see him ? We see him. 
I have lost my pencil, do you see it ? He does not see me. Does 
he not see thee ? I see you. I have a good pen, and I will give it 
to my sister. I have bought (achete) a gold thimble, and I am going 
to give it to Lucy. I know him. I know her. I know them. Do 
you not know me ? Do you not know us ? We do not know him 
You do not know her. Do you see her often ? 

Exercise 60. 

See § 41, 42, 43, 45, 49, 53. 

She sees me. She does not see thee. We do not see him. We see 
her. You see them. She knows me. She speaks to me. William 
sees thee; he is speaking to thee. Mary sees us; she is speaking to 
us. I know him; I will send him soine money. Your father will 
punish you; he will write to you. He sees her; but he does not 
speak to her. Does Edward see you ? Have you seen Stephen to- 
day ? I have not seen him to-day. I shall see him to-morrow. He 
nas not seen me. Has he not seen you? 

Exercise 61. 

See § 41, 42, 43, 45, 49, 53. 

Do you give me two pine-apples? I give you three pine-apples. 
1 will follow thee. He follows us. She calls them. Do you speak 
to me ? He is writing to us. We shall punish the boys. Why do 
you punish them? Those fans are not mine, nor (ni) thine, nor 
hers. Whose (a qui) are they? Eat a peach; this is sweeter than 
that. Send these violets and snow-drops to Lucy. Give me the 
former. Where is the physician ? Have you not seen him ? I saw 
him yesterday, but 1 did not speak to him. Has your brother writ' 
ten to him? He has written to him, but he has not sent him the 
letter, (lettre, f.) 

7 



74 



ELExMENTARY 



Vocabulary. 

N.B. The numbers in the Vocabulary designate the verb in the 
Appendix, which is to be used as a model. 



Lamp, 
Lend, 

Light, verb, 
Perfectly, 

Carry, 
Take, 
Bring, 
Take away, j 



lampe, f. 

preter. (3) 

allumer. (3) 

parfaitement. 

' Mener, (3) 
Mener, (3) 
Amener, (3) 
Ummenerj (3) 



Pocket, 
Shut, verb, 
Speak, 
Why, 



meaning 

to 

lead, 



applied to 

infants and 

inanimate 

objects, 



poche, f. 

fermer. (3) 

parler. (3) 

pourquoi. 
(Porter. (3) 
Porter. (3) 
Apporter .{$} 
Emporter.(3) 



Exercise 62. 

See § 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 49, 50.. 

Shut the door. Shut it. Let us shut it. Let us gather the roses. 
Let us gather them. Gather them. Write thy letter. Send it to 
thy brother.. Light the lamp. Light it. Do not light it. I am 
writing a letter; give it to William. Send me some books. I do 
not see them. She writes to me often. Write to me every day, 
(tous les jours.) Were you calling me? Tell me where she is. I 
will write to them to-morrow. Mary is at the door. I see her. Call 
her. Follow me. Believe us. Take away this; leave that. 

Exercise 63. 

See § 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 49, 50. 

Have you any grapes? Send them to the market. No, I will 
send them to my aunt. Do not give them to the children. Where 
are the good pens? They are on the table. I prefer them to yours. 
Put them in my copy-book. Do not put them in your pocket. 
Write to her. Do not write to her. Send her to my sister. Do 
not send her. I have a now book. 1 will give it to Lucy. Give 
it to Mary. Do not give it to Lucy. Didst thou not give Henry 
an orange ? He has eaten his, and that of his sister. The former 
was (itait) larger than the latter. My flowers are not so pretty as 
Mary's 



ERENCH EXERCISES. 75 

Exercise 64. 

See § 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 48, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52. 

You have my book, give it to me. You have Mary's goll pen, 
give it to me. Give them to me. Have you any money? Lend 
it to us. And a purse also? Lend it to us. Lend them to us. 
i T ou have French books and Italian books ) lend us some of them. 
My brother will send them to you, or he will bring them to you him- 
self, (lui-meme ) Send them to-morrow. Are you acquainted with 
my uncle? I am acquainted with him. I know my lesson. Dost 
thou know it perfectly ? We do not know ours. What a beautiful 
pine-apple ! carry it to my sister. Bring some to me. Do not take it 
away. 

Exercise 65. 

See § 41, 42, 43, 45, 48, 51, 53. 

You have my pencil. John gave* it to me. He did not give* it to 
you. Have you Mary's pen? She lent* it tome. She will lend it 
to thee. Edward sends him to me. We send him to thee. I send 
them to you. t He sends her to us. Lewis gave* me some. Did 
he give* you some? I gave* them to you. William sent us there. 
He has some new books. He lent* them to Edward. He lent* them 
to me. He sent them to me there. He sent them to us there. He 
sent some to us there. I will speak to her of it. We have seen him. 

Exercise 66. 

See § 50, 52, 53. 

Did you give* some money to the blind woman? I gave* her a 
dollar. I gave* it to her. I gave* her some. Lucy lent* her some. 
Mary will send her some. Give her a new hat. Julia has given it 
to her. He has given it to them. Bring a pencil to Mary. Bring 
it to her. Take my purse to Julia. Take it to her. Carry these 
oranges to your aunt. Carry them to her. Take them away. Bring 
your sister here. Bring her to me. 

* The pupil will translate these verbs by the compound of the 
Present Tense, or Passe Indefini. See the Remarks on that Tense 
in the Appendix, page 137, and the Remark on the following page. 



76 ELEMENTARY 

Remark. — The past participle, when preceded by the verb have i 
agrees in gender and number with the pronoun which is the direct 
object of the verb, when that object is placed before the verb; as, 

He has seen her, II i/a vtje. 

He has seen them, II les a vus. 

Exercise 67. 

Have you seen her to-day? I have taken her to her brother's 
house. He has given her the books. He had given them to me. 
Emily has seen him. She has not seen us. Have you my pen? 
I have lent it to Mary. Does John sell butter? He sells it. He 
sells it to me. He does not give it to me. Do you give me the 
cream ? I give it. I give it to you. I do not sell it to you. Does 
not Mary give it to me ? I give you the best coffee. Da we not 
give it to her? Do you give it to your brother? I do not give It 
to him; I give it to thee. Carry thy boo£s to school. Carry them 
there. 

54. — En is expressed in French in many instances where 
of it or of them is understood in English, especially when the 
sentence ends with a cardinal number or any word expressing 
quantity ; as, 

How many inkstands have you? I have three. 
Oombien d'encriers avez-vous? J'en ai trois. 

Exercise 68. 

a. had five penknives, but I have lost two. If you like [aimez) 
those apples, take some; we have a great many (beaucoup.) My mo- 
ther bought twelve handkerchiefs, and she gave me six. I picked 
three roses, and I will give you two. Carry those pinks to your 
sisters. Carry them to them. Carry them some. Take that blind 
man to your house. Take away my horse. No, {turn) bring him to 
me. You will do that better than I. We were not speaking of them. 
I wish some good ink. Do you wish black ink? I will give you 
three dollars, and I will lend you live. You have plums and pears* 
I prefer the latter. 



There, (with 


a verb,) y. 


Think, 


penser. (3) 


Trust, 


se fier.* 


Warn, 


avertir. (4) 


With, 


avec. 


Without, 


sans. 


Umbrella, 


parapluie, m 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 77 

Vocabulary. 

Apply, s'adresser* 

Compel, forcer. (67) 

Give back, rendre* (7) 

Promise, verb, promettre. (35) 

Lead, verb, mener. (3) 

Show, verb, montrer. (3) 

Stick, baton, m. 

Return, (to give back,) rendre. (7) 
Return, (to come back,) revenir. (61) 
Return, (to go back,) retourner. (3) 
* These are Reflected verbs, and are conjugated like Se Promener 

in the Appendix. 

Exercise 69. 

I have brought you the book which (que) I had promised you. 
Where is it ? Show it to*me. I will show it to you when you have 
(future) finished your work. Give it to me. It does not belong to 
me. I will lend it to you. Lend it to me now; I will return it to 
you to-morrow. Will you compel us to it? Have you warned them 
of it? I lend you my umbrella. Does he lend you his? Send 
him there. Send them there.y We do not speak to them of it. 
Show me the lesson. Have you shown it to them ? Who will open 
the door? I. Send me mutton, beef, and veal. He, he will not 
do it to-day. 

Exercise 70. 

I give back to you your slate. I give it back to you. Have 
you returned to me my pen-knife? I will return it to you to-mor- 
row. I sell it to you. You have a good pen. Do you give it to 
me ? I give it to you ; I do not sell it to you. Henry warned him 
of it. We warned them of it. I sent him. I sent him to her. 
I sent him to her there. We sent him to them there. We sent 
them to him there. John sent them to her there. You sent him to 
them. The queen sent her to them. My aunt sent her to them 
there. Does he take his children to school? He takes them there 
every day. Do they take their books there? They send some 
there to me* 

7* 



78 



ELEMENTARY 



§ 55. — The pupil has been taught § 45 that personal pro 
nouns preceded by the preposition to are considered in French 
the indirect objects of the verb with which they are connected, 
and the preposition a is understood, or rather comprised in the 
pronoun. 

But after the verbs aller, venir, and some other verbs of 
motion, some of the Neuter verbs, and all the Reflected verbs, 
the preposition cannot be comprised in the pronoun, as in 
§ 45; it must be expressed, and consequently the pronoun must 
come after the verb, and must be translated into French as 
directed in § 47. 

Exercise 71. 

Your uncle is here, apply to him. If you wish help, (secours, 
m.) come to me; do not go to them. Trust to him, but do not 
trust to her. Think upon (a) me. I will jthink of (&) thee. Were 
you speaking to him, or to her? I trust thee, and I shall trust 
thee always. If you wish money, apply to my sister. I went to 
her, and she sent me to thee. I trust to her, I do not trust to 
them. She did not apply to you. Why did she not apply to me, 
when she wished help? Will you trust yourself to me? Go to him, 
if you have need (besoin) of any thing. 

Vocabulary. 

By, 



After, prep. apres. 
At, d. 

Behind, derriere, 

At the house of, 

Before, 

Before, 

By, 



For, 
Near, 



par. 
pour. 

pres de. 
chez. 
avant. 
devant. 
d cote de. 



(speaking of time and order,) 
(speaking of place and presence,) 
(by the side of,) 

Exercise 72. 

See § 47. 

Follow your sister, but do not run after her. I wish to arrive 
[a r river) before her. I am near thee, but thou dost not see me. 
He will do it for thee to-morrow. This is for him. Do not go be- 
fore me. I will walk (marcher') by my sister. Julia is at the hous* 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 7'J 

of her brother. Mary is at my house, (at the house of me.) 1 
shall go to your uncle's after to-morrow. I will not go with them. 
Have you applied to her? Was he speaking of me? He was 
speaking of thee. I will go with her. Without thee, I should not 
have found my book. Without me, your gloves would have been 
lost. 

Exercise 73. 

Do not go with him. They came to me. Return with me. We 
were running with her. This umbrella is not mine. It is your 
cousin's; return it to him. Come sit (inf.) by me. Lucy and her 
sisters are sewing, she sews better than they. Were you writing to 
her or to them?- You and I (we) have not received our money. 
My cousin will write the letter for thee. I cannot see you ; you are 
behind me. John will walk the first, and his brothers will follow 
him. Will you walk before me? Bring me the stick. Bring it 
to me. Carry it to him. Do not carry it to him. 

Vocabulary. 

On, before a noun, sur, prep. j On it, dessus, adv. 

Under, do. do. sous, prep. I Under it, dessous, adv. 

See § 47, and the Remark under it. 
Exercise 74. 

Does he put the stick under the table? He puts it under it. 
Does he put it on it or under it? He puts it on it. Send me the 
books. Send them to me. Send them to us. Let us send them 
to him. Let us send them to them. Send some there. Send me 
some. Give me the bread. Give me some. Give it to him. Give 
him some. Send him to us. Send her to us. Give back to us 
our ink. Give it back to me. Lead the horse to the river. Lead 
him there. Let us lead him there. Here are (void) two horses. 
Lead them there. I cannot go there without her. You will be there 
before me 



80 ELEMENTARY 

SECT. V. REFLECTED PRONOUNS. 

§ o6. — The reflected pronouns are placed before the verb, 
except where the verb is in the imperative mood used affirma- 
tively. They are, 

Myself, or to myself, me. 

Thyself, or to thyself, te. 

Himself, herself, itself, or ) 

To himself, to herself, to itself, J 

Ourselves, or to ourselves, nous. 

Yourselves, or to yourselves, vous. 

Themselves, or to themselves, se. 

§ 57. — But when the verb is in the imperative mood used 
affirmatively, the reflected pronouns are placed after the verb, 
and 

Thyself, or to thyself, is expressed by toi. 

§ 58. — When the reflected pronouns are preceded by any 
other preposition than to y they are expressed as follows: 



Myself, 




is mot or moi-meme. 


Thyself, 




" tot or toi-meme. 


Himself, 




(c lui or lui-meme. 


Herself, 




u die or clle-meme. 


Ourselves, 




il nous or nous-memes. 


Yourself, 




u vous or vous-mcme. 


Yourselves, 




u vous or vous-memes. 


Themselves, masc, 




" eux or eux-mcmes. 


Themselves, fern., 




" elles or elles-memes. 


One's self. 


Example* 


" soi or soi-meme. 

*. 


§ 56. — He amuses himself, 


11 s' amuse. 


He recalls to 
the clay, 


himself ) 


11 se rappcllc lejour. 


§ 57. — Dress thyself, 




Habillc-toi. 


§ 58.— For thyself, 




Pour toi. 


Of one's self, 




Be soi. 



FUENCH EXERCISES. 81 



Vocabulary. 


Apply, (to persons,) s'adresser.* 


Find, trouvcr. (3) 


Apply, (to things,) s 1 appliquer* 


Finish, finir. (4) 


Blame, verb, blamer. (3) 


Nail, (finger,) ongle y m. 


l3urn, verb, bruhr. (3) 


Repent, se repentir. (34) 


Cut, verb, couper. (3) 


Study, verb, etudier. (3) 


Dress, verb, Tiabiller. (3) 


Too, too much, trop. 


Face, fig ure i £ 


Warm, chauffer. (3) 


Fault, faute, f. 


Wash, laver. (3) 


^ See Se Promener. 


Exerc 


'se 75. 



I blame myself, and I repent of my fault. I will finish that work 
myself. I am not speaking of myself. We will speak of it to the 
master ourselves. Thou appliest thyself too closely (trap) to thy 
studies. I wish to see thee thyself. We will apply to our uncls 
when we need (aurons besoin de) help. The boys are going to the 
baker's themselves. Will they not warm themselves at the fire? 
They will warm themselves by walking (en marchani) fast. Do you 
find yourself better to-day ? My sisters walk every day. He trusts 
too much to himself. 

Remark. — Reflected verbs are used in French, in speaking 
of performing an action upon one's body or limbs ; as, 

I wash my hands, Je ME lave les mains. 

Exercise 76. 

I am warming myself. I am warming my feet. Henry is wash- 
ing himself, ne is washing his hands. We dress ourselves. The 
little child does not dress himself. He will burn his fingers. He 
is warming his hands. That child is burning his shoes. Is he not 
burning his feet? Mary is washing her muslin gown. Lucy is 
washing her face. Do you wash your hands and face? I have 
cut my finger. Thou hast cut thy arm. He has cut his hand. We 
have cut our fingers. How have you broken your arm ? The 
child is cutting his hair and his nails. * 

-A • 



82 ELEMENTARY. 



CHAPTER VIII. 



THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 



§ 59. — The relative pronoun who is translated into 
French thus : 

Who, qui, lequel. 

Whose, of whom, dontj de qui, duquel. 

Whom, (object of a verb,) que. 

Whom, (governed by a preposition,) qui, lequel. 

§ 60. — -Who is almost always translated by qui,, which is 
used for both genders and both numbers; as, 

The man who comes, L'homme qui vient. 

The woman who comes, La femme qui vient. 

The men who come, Les hommes qui viennent. 

Remark. — Lequel is only used to avoid ambiguity. When the 
relative pronoun is separated from its antecedent by another noun, 
who, whom, that and which are translated by lequel, which is varied 
in the following manner, to agree with its antecedent in number and 
gender. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

masc. fern. masc. fern. 

Lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles, who, which. 



§61.— Whose 



n nose i 

r\ r> X arc translated by^ 

Of whom ) 



dont. | both genders and 
de qui. J numbers. 
duquel, masc. sing. 
de laquelle, fern. sing. 
desquels, masc. plur. 
[ desquelles, fem. plur. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 8J 

Examples. 

A. man whose brother you know, Un homme dont vous connaissez 

le frere. 
A woman whose virtues are Une femme dont hs vertus sont 

known, connues. 

The boy of whom I speak, Le garcon dont je parle. 

The girl of whom I speak, ■ La file dont je parle. 

Remark 1. — Whose, when followed by a noun which is not gov- 
erned by a preposition, is expressed by dont ; and dont must be fol- 
lowed by the nominative of the next verb, whatever may be the 
construction of the sentence in English; as, 

The man whose genius is great, L'homme dont le genie est grand. 
The man whose talents we admire, L'homme dont nous admirons les 

talents. 

Remark 2. — Whose, when followed by a noun which is governed 
by a preposition, is translated by de qui or duquel, &c; not by dont; 
as, 
A man on WHOSE friendship I can Un homme sur Vamitie de QJJlje 

rely, puis compter. 

Remark 3. — Duquel, de laquelle, &c, are employed to express 
whose and of ichom, when the relative pronoun being separated from 
its antecedent by a number of words, the sentence might be rendered 
ambiguous by using dont and de qui, which being of either number 
and gender, do not indicate at once the noun to which they relate; as, 

This is that young man's sister of whom Void la sctiir de ce jeicne liomme 
we were speaking", de laqt:elle nous parlions. 

§t»c% -rrri ( tne object of a verb, and employed } 7 , 

b2. — Whom, I . . \ .. ' . r J y que. lequel. 

1 / without a preposition, is, j *■ J ■*■ 

tjtt ( when preceded by any preposition ) . 7 . 

Whom, < l f . \ qui, lequel. 

Examples. 

The man whom I saw, L'homme que fai vu. 

The man to whom I spoke, L'homme d qui faiparlf. 



84 



ELEMENTARY. 



§ 63. — The relative pronouns which and that are 
translated into French thus; 



Which, when it is the subject or nominative 

of a verb, is translated by 
That, when it can be changed into who or 

which, and is the sicbject of a verb, is 



qui. 



Examples. 
The wind which blows, Le vent qui souffle. 

The child that cries, L' enfant qui pleure. 

The fruits that ripen, Les fruits qui murissent. 

C when placed after a noun that is ") 
§ 64. — Of which, < not governed by a preposition, is > dont. 
(^ expressed by • \ 

f duquel, masc. sing. 
( when placed after a noun that 77 77 r 

r\r 7 - 7 ) . , ,, , ... J de laqueue, iem. si 

Uj W/llC/l) \ is preceded by a preposition, < 2 7 

I is expressed by desquels, masc. pluj 



ang 

ur. 
^ desquelles, fem. plur. 



Examples. 



I have some foreign flowers, the J 'a* desjleurs etrangeres, dont Vodeur 

smell of which is very agreeable. &rt £r& agreable. 

I have some foreign flowers, the J'ai des fleurs etrangeres, dont je 

smell of which I do not like. n'aime pas Vodeur. 

I have some foreign flowers, to the J'ai des fleurs Strangeres, a Vodeur 

smell of which I shall never get accus- desqtjelles je ne riaccout inner ai jamais. 
tomed. 

N. B. The pupil should carefully notice the construction of the 
preceding sentences. 

In the first and second examples, of which being placed after a 
noun that is not governed by a preposition, is expressed by dont; 
and dont is placed immediately after its antecedent, (the noun to 
which it refers,) and is followed by the noun or pronoun, which is 
the nominative of the next verb. 

In the third example, of which, being placed after a noun that is 
preceded by a preposition, is expressed by desquelles, and not by dont. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 



85 



§ 65. — Which, when it is the object of a verb, is 

rp-i . f when it can be changed into wham, or 
1 nat > \ wh 



>que. 



which, and is the object of a verb, is 

C lequel, masc. sing. 

Tjrz -7 , , ... laquelle. fern. sing. 

Vr fllC/l) governed by a preposition, is ^ - 

] lesquels, masc. plur. 

[_ lesquelles, fern. plur. 

Remark. — When the preposition that governs lequel is de 
or d, it is contracted with it, as follows : 



SINGULAR. 

masc. fern. 

Lequel, laquelle, 

duquel, de laquelle, 

auquel, a laquelle, 

duquel, de laquelle, 



PLURAL. 

masc. fern. 

lesquels, lesquelles, 

desquels, desquelles, 

auxquels, auxquelles, 

desquels, desquelles, 



who, wldch. 
of whom, of which, 
to vjJwm, to which, 
from ivhom, fro?n which. 



§ 66. — The pupil will perceive from the preceding lessons that 
we translate 
who, -\ 

which, > when nominative to the following verb, by qui. 
that, j 
whom, -. 

which, > when object of the following verb, by que. 
that, y 

Examples. 



The man who \ 

The horse which > comes. 

The chaise that ) • 

The man whom \ 

The horse which > I see. 

The coach that ) 



Vhomme qui 
Le cheval qui 
La chaise qui 
Vhomme que 
Le cheval que 
Le carrosse que 



vient. 



je vois. 



( cequi. 
§ 67. — What , standing" for that which, is j or 

V. ce que. 
(1.) Ce qui is used when immediately followed by a verb of which 
qui is the subject nominative ; as, 

Always do what is right ; i. e. that which is right 
Fxites toujour s CE QUI est juste. 



86 



ELEMENTARY 



(2.) Ce que is used when a nominative comts in between 
it and the next verb. Que is in the objective case. 

What we say is true j i. e. that which we say is true. 
Ce que nous dlsons est vrai. 

used in a vague sense, 
, or referring to a phrase, [QUOI. 

VV/llC/l) /and governed by a preposition, 

Examples, 



§ es.—w/iat 9 



} 



William learned his lessons; after which he went to walk. 
Guillaume a appris ses leco?is; apres quoi il est alle* se promener. 

§ 69. — Of what is de ce qui, de ce que; as, 

I speak of what is true ; i. e. of that which, &c. 
Je parle de ce qui est vrai. 
I speak of what you know. 
Je parle de ce que vous savez. 

What of is ce dont; as, 

What he speaks of is not true; that of which, &c. 
Ce dont il parle rtest pas vrai. 

§ 70. — To ivhat is a ce qui, a ce que; as, 

Apply to ivhat is useful ; i. e. that which, &c. 
Appliqicez-vous a ce qui est utile. 
Pay attention to what I say. 
Faites attention a ce que je dis. 

What to is ce a quoi; as, 

Wliat you apply to is not useful ; i. e. that to which, &c. 
Ce a quoi votes vous appliquez rtcst pas utile. 



Absolute, absolu. 

Happen, arriver. (3) 

Lady, dame, f. 

Letter, lettre, f. 

Meadow, 'prairie, f. 

Pick, cue ill ir. (22) 

Power, poitvoir, in. 

Shun, 6 v iter. (3) 

Exercise 77. 
The man who sells apples is at the door 
sells strawberries. The grass which grows. 



Vocabulary. 






Strike, 


f rapper. (3) 




Study, 


etude, £ 




Skip, 


bondir. (4) 




Sure, 


sur. 




Very, adv. 


tret, fort, bica. 


) 


Vice, 


vice, m. 




Vex, 


f acker. (3) 




Wear, 


porter. (3) 



Call the woman who 
Do you see the lambs 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 87 

that skip in the meadows ? The boy that runs so (si) fast. The man 
whose apples you are picking. The king whom we fear. The lady 
whom you see is my sister. The house which we sold. The flowers 
which you are gathering are beautiful. Lewis has a horse which is 
worth two hundred dollars. The horse which you see in the meadow 
is not his. The jewels that you wear. The man with whom I came. 
The carriage in which I came. 

§ 71. — The relative pronoun, whom, ivhich, or that, is often 
omitted in English, but it must always be expressed in French 
when it is required by the meaning or construction of the sen- 
tence ; as, 

Where is the book you were reading? 
Ou est le livre que vons lisiez ? 

Exercise 78. 

The king whose power is absolute. The physician to whose pru- 
dence I owe much, (beaucoup.) The niece of whom I speak. The 
birds of which you speak. The coach which is at the door. The 
house which we saw yesterday is for sale. (Ex. 54.) The man with 
whom Edward is walking. The carpenter to whom he gave the gold. 
The horse on which I returned to the city. I love what you love. 
Eat what I give you. Tell me what vexes you. The dog that is 
running. Trie boys who are picking cherries. The boys whom you 
will punish. The grapes you sell are not ripe. The lady from whom 
I received this letter. 

Exercise 79. 

The pencil with which I am writing. The pen with which thou 
art writing. There are (voila) the books for which I gave eighty 
dollars. You are buying a book which is very dear. The book 
which you have bought is very dear. The book of which you speak 
is dear. He has lost all the money he had. The physician whom I 
see. The physician of whom I speak. The pine-apples of which Mary 
speaks. I have what pleases me. Edward does not sell what I sell. 
The table on which you write. This is that lawyer's niece of whom 
we were speaking. I love what you love. 



88 ELEMENTARY 

§ 72. — When a relative pronoun, governed by a preposition, 
is not expressed in English, and the preposition th&t governs 
it, is placed at the end of the sentence, the relative pronoun must 
be expressed in French, preceded by the preposition ; as, 

Do you know the lady I am writing to ? 

This sentence should be translated thus : 

Connaissez-vous la dame a qui fScris? 

Do you know the lady to whom I am writing ? 

Exercise SO. 

I do not know the shoemaker you speak of. We believe what he 
says. Do you know what vexes her ? Here is (yoici) the boy I was 
running after. What you speak of will happen. She is speaking 
of what will happen to-day. Tell rne what I shall say. You whose 
sons are so attentive. The boys I see in the meadow. This is 
the stick with which he struck me. Where is the horse you have 
bought? The horse to which I have given some water. You speak 
of the lady whose aunt has been ill, (malade.) 

He trusts to what he has done. What you trust to is not sure. The 
farmer whose garden you have seen. The queen whose jewels are 
lost. Shun vice and love what is good. Do not you believe what 
I say? The studies to which he applies, (s'cippliqiie.) The chair 
on which you are sitting, (etes assis.) The pens with which Lucy 
writes. The coach in which I came. The apricots which you are 
picking. Give me the pen you are writing with. I do not know 
whom it belongs to. We speak of what we know. What we talk 
of every day. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 89 



CHAPTER IX, 

THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 

§ 73. — The interrogative pronoun who is translated 
jito French thus : 



Who, 


qui, quel. 


Whose, 


de qui j d qui. 


Whom, 


qui. 



(1.) Who is translated by qui, when it does not refer to a noun 
coming after the verb, of which who is the subject or nominative; as, 

Who wrote this letter ? Qui a ecrit cette lettre ? 

(2.) Who is expressed by quel, quelle, quels, quelles, when the next 
verb is followed by a noun to which this pronoun quel refers; as, 

Who are these ladies ? Quelles sont ces dames ? 

N.B. Remember quel must agree in number and gender with the noun 
to which it refers in the sentence. Quel is really an interrogative adjective, 
and the noun with which it agrees is understood, the sentence above 
reading thus, when the ellipsis is supplied : Quelles {dames) sont ces dames f 

§ 74. — Whose, meaning of whom, is de qui. 

Whose, \ USQd before ; he verb *' be : signifying) & • 
1 (possession, duty, or right, is ) 2 

Examples. 

Whose pen have you ? • La 'plume de qui avez-vous f 
Whose pen is this ? A QUI est cette plume ? 

N.B. Whose, used interrogatively, is never expressed by dont, which 

is always a relative pronoun. 

8* 



90 ELEMENTARY 

§ 75. — The interrogative pronoun which is thus 
translated : 



Which < 



deferring to a noun masc. sing, is quel, lequel, 

" " fem. sing, is quelle, laquelle. 
" -" masc. plur. is quels, lesquels, 
" « fem. plur. is quelles, lesquelles. 

Remark 1. — Which, coming immediately before the verb to be, and 
referring to a noun following that verb, is expressed by quel, &c.; as, 

Which are the largest islands'? Quelles sont les plus grandes lies? 

Remark 2. — Which, coming immediately before the verb to be, 
when that verb is not followed by a noun, is translated by lequel, &c, 
as, 

Look at thofie roses* which is the Regardez ces roses-la; laquelle est 
prettiest ? la plus jolie ? 

Remark 3. — Which, meaning which one, which ones, and not fol- 
lowed by the verb to be, is translated by lequel, &c, as, 

Those are my horses; which (one) Voifa mes chevaux; lequel admirez- 
do you admire the most % vous le plus? 

Remark 4. — Which, followed by of, is translated by lequel, &c, 
as, 

Which of these oranges will you Laquelle de ces oranges voulez-vous? 
have? 

Remark 5. — Lequel cannot be used as an adjective, and therefore 
must never be followed immediately by a noun. When it is pre 
ceded by the preposition de or d, contraction takes place as in the 
relative pronoun lequel, which is declined on page 85; as, 

To which of my uncles have you Auquel de mcs onclcs avcz-vous 
written? ccrit? 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 91 

CI. qu'est-ce qui. 

§ 76. — The interrogative pronoun J 2. < ,' 

nri i- 4 i*'/i S (qu'est-ce que. 

What is translated by . 2 

^4. yz/e/ 3 quelle, &c. 
(1.) TFAa? ; signifying u7ia^ ^m<7, and employed as the nominative 
to a verh ; is expressed by qu'est-ce qui; as. 

What vexes you? Quhst-ce qui vousfdche? 

(2.) What j signifying ichat thing, and used without a preposition 
as the object of a verb, is expressed by que or qu'est-ce que; as, 

What are you doing? Que fait es-vous? or 

Qu'est-ce que vousfaites? 

(2.) What, when it means ichat sort of thing, or of what conse- 
quence, and is followed by the verb to be, is likewise expressed by 
que or quest-ce que; as, 

What are men before God? Que sont les hommes devant Dieu? 

What is light? Qu'est-ce que la lumiere? 

(3.) What, signifying ichat thing, and preceded by a preposition, 
whether expressed or understood, is translated by quoi; as, 

Of what is he speaking? Be quoi parle-t-il? 

(3.) What, used as an interjection, is quoi; as, 

What ! is that my brother? Quoi! est-ce la monfrh'e? 

(4.) What, when it does not mean what thing, and relates to a 
noun placed after the verb which follows ichat, is translated by quel, 
quelle, quels, quelles, according to the gender and number of the noun 
tc which it relates; as, 

What are your motives? Quels sont vos motifs? 



3 6****^y ~ c^ £-**y* 


*7~u - 




92 


ELEMENTAR? 
Vocabulary. 




America, 
Asia, 


AmSrique, f. 
Asie, f. 


j Motive, 
Name, 


motif m. 
nom, m. 


Africa, 

City, 
Continent, 


Afrique, f. 
ville, f. 
continent , m. 


Name, verb, 
Republic, 
Ride, verb, 


nommer. (3) 
rejmblique, f. 
monter. (3) 


Europe, 
Form, verb, 


Europe, f. 
former. (3) 


Hiver, 

' State, 


riviere , f. 
^£a£, m. 


Island, 
Look at, 


£Ze, f. 
regarder. (3) 


Study, verb, 
Sun, 


etudier. (3) 
sofei7, m. 



Northern, septentrional, or c?w Tiorc?. 
Southern, meridional, or c?w swc?. 
Eastern, oriental. 
Western, occidental. 

Exercise 81. 

Who wishes to pick strawberries ? Who will go with me ? Who 
are those children we see in the meadow? Whose horses have you 
bought ? Whose gloves are these ? Whose son are you ? Whom have 
you seen to day? Of whom were you speaking to my mother? 
With whom will you go this evening to the city? You have seen 
my horses ; which do you prefer ? Which is the best ? Which is the 
best translation? Whose house is that? I do not know # whose it is. 
What are you doing there ? (Id) What makes you laugh ? What 
do you wish to say ? Of what were you talking ? What is a conti- 
nent? 

Exercise 82. 

Look at those two houses, and tell me which you prefer. Can 
you not tell me which is the prettiest ? Whose fan is this ? Who has 
done that? What! is it (est-ce) you? What are Edward's motives? 
Which are the largest rivers? Which of these books were you 
reading? Of what is John guilty? To which of the boys shall I 
give the watch? Who gave thee this beautiful dog? For what dost 
thou call me? Who is calling me? Which of these horses shall I 
ride? Which horse shall I ride? What is an island? What is 
the name of that river? 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 93 

Exercise 83. 

Which are the northern states? There are two oranges whose 
are they? Which do you prefer? Which is the largest? What! 
is he not willing to speak to Lewis? Which of these roses do you 
wish? Whose boots have you ? Whose are these copy-books ? Whose 
daughter is she? What is a republic? To which of thy sisters 
shall I send some snow-drops? In which of those houses does thy 
aunt live ? Which is the largest ? Which has the largest garden ? 
About We) what are the boys talking? What! is she not here? 
Will you have oranges or pine-apples? I prefer the latter to the 
former. 

Exercise 84. 

Which is the eastern continent? In what city do you live? 
What is the sun? The stars are suns. Give these handkerchiefs to 
those girls. These flowers are prettier than those. I have bought 
a cow and a horse; the former costs (coute) me five and twenty 
dollars, the latter eighty-five. What! you have given too much. 
What is the name of that star? What is Mary looking at? Whose 
apron has she? This lesson is shorter than that. What are kings 
and queens? On what island? What continent do Europe, Asia, 
and Africa form ? Eat this pear, and take to your sister the ones 
that you have in your apron. What is honor? 

Exercise 85. / 

What lesson are you studying? Which is the largest of the west- 
ern states? Which is the smallest of the northern states? He only 
[seul) knows my motives. The physician to whom you are writing 
is not at home. Let us send her some lilies. Let us send them to 
them. I ! pick (cueillir) your flowers ! Who has done that? It was 
not I; it was she. Bring me a copy-book. Do not bring it to me. 
He and I (we) were together. I will go with thee. This stick is 
mine, and this umbrella is hers. This peach is not Mary's; she has 
eaten hers. Do not put the apples on the table; put them under it. 
Have you seen him? I have not spoken to him. Where is the 
pine-apple I gave to the boys? They have given it to their mother. 
I prefer there cherries to those. 



94 ELEMENTARY 



CHAPTER X. 
THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

SECT. I. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS WHICH ARE NEVER JLnrsED 

TO A NOUN. 

§ 77. — Every one, each one, chacun. 

Nobody, no one, none, any body, personne. 

Other people, others, autrui. 

One, somebody, we, you, they, peo- 
ple, &c. on. 
Somebody, some one, any one, quelqvPun, masc. sing. 

f meaning a few, not folO 
lowed by a noun, but I 7 . 

t ,. ' c rqueiques-uns* masc. plur. 

standing for a noun of \ * * A 

the masculine gender, J 



Some, 
Any, 



oOme, V t {o. do. standing for a f 7 r i 

' < ° > quelques-uneS) fern. plur. 

Any, ( noun of the fern, gender. ) 

Whoever, whosoever, any person that, quicotiqjie. 
One another, each other, Pun P autre. 

Chacun, referring to a noun of the feminine gender, is chacun c ; 
it has no plural. 

Personne, when a pronoun, is always masc. and singular. When 
personne means nobody, no one, none, ne must be placed before the 
verb; as, 

Nobody believes it, Personne NE le croit. 

Autrui has neither gender nor number; it is always preceded by a 
preposition. 

Quiconque is invariable, and the verb of which it is the subject h 
in the singular number. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 95 

Hun V autre, is declined in the following manner, viz : — 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fern. 

L'un l'aiitre, l'une l'autre, one anotJier. 

L'un de l'autre, l'ur.e de l'autre, of one anotJier. 

L'un a l'autre, l'une a l'autre, to one another, 

PLURAL. 

Masc. Fem. 

Les uns les autres, les unes les autres, one anotJier. 

Les uns des autres, les unes des autres, of one anotJier. 

Les uns aux autres, les unes aux autres, to one anotJier. 

N. B. The pupil must remember that the preposition which comes 
before one another in English, is placed between the two words Van, V autre, 
in French. 

Remarks on the Indefinite Pronoun On. 

1. — On is always the nominative of a verb, and, though it repre- 
sents we, they, people, which are plural, it requires the verb to be in 
the third person singular; as, 

On dit, They say, people say. 

2. — The following and other similar indefinite expressions are also 
translated into French by on with the verb in the active voice : 

It will be said, On dira. 

It has been thought, On a cru. 

3. — English passive verbs used indefinite!?/ require the active 
voice in French, with on for the nominative ; and the nominative of 
the verb in English becomes its object in French; as, 

I have been told that he is gone, On rrfa dit quit est parti. 
Rewards will be given to-morrow, On donnera des recompenses demain. 

Exercise 86. 

People believe it. Do not they believe it? Do not they say so 
(7e)? It will soon (bienfot) be known, if that is true. It was told 
to my sister yesterday. Have the men been called from the meadow ? 
Do not speak ill of one another. Whoever says so, says what is 



96 ELEMENTARY 

not true. Each one of the knives. Each one of the forks. No one 
knows it. The works of others. Is there any one at the door? 
There is nobody. Take some of these apples. Somebody has taken 
my book. Is no one willing to come with me ? Have all the play- 
things been found? Some of the apricots are not ripe. 

Exercise 87. 

Send me some of those copy-books to-morrow. All the apples 
have been eaten. Each of these books has its value. Put them 
each in (d) its place. My brother will do it better than anybody. 
Is it known who wrote that book? Do not do to others what you 
would not wish (them to do to you,) (que Von vousfit.) The boys 
are talking to one another. It is said that the king is dead. Have 
the cherries been picked ? Each star. Each one of the stars. Which 
is the largest of the western states ? What lesson are you studving ? 

Vocahulary. 



Ask for, demander. (3) 

Any thing, rien. 

Nothing, ne . . . rien. 

Call, (at a house,) passer. (3) 
Engraving, gravure, f. 



Every body, tout le mondc. 

Expect, attendre. (7) 

Like, verb, aimer. (3) 

Still, yet, encore. 

Whether, si. 



Exercise 88. 

I can give you nothing. Do you know whether your uncle's 
horses have been sold? They have not been sold yet. Have you 
still any of those engravings which you showed me the other day? 
I have a few of them, that I will sell you cheap (ban marche.) I 
expect somebody. Has anybody called here to-day? I have been 
told that your aunt is sick. Some lessons are too long. Some of 
the lessons are short. Give- me some of those caps. What are 
they looking at? How did he burn his hand? What does the poor 
woman expect? This cap is not so pretty as the one that I have 
made. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 



97 



SECT. II. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS SOMETIMES JOINED TO 
NOUNS, AND SOMETIMES NOT. 

§ 78. — All, every, every thing, tout, raasc. sing. 



Pun et P autre, 
tous les deux, m. 
toutes les deux, f. 
Pun ou P autre, 
ni Pun ni P autre, 
autre. 

nul, masc., nulle, fern. 
aucun, m. aucune, f. ' 
pas un, m. pas une, f. 
meme. 

plusieurs, masc. and f. 
tel, masc. telle, fern. 

These words, when joined to a noun, are adjectives; when used 
without a noun, they are pronouns. 

Ni Tun ni V autre, nul, aucun, and pas un } require ne before the 
verb with which they are connected. 

Dun et P autre is declined thus : 



Both, 

Both,* 

Both, 

Either, 

Neither, 

Other, 

No, none, not one, 

Not any, <hone, not cne, 

No, not one, 

Same, 

Several, many, 

Such, 



SINGULAR. 



Masc. 
l'un et l'autre, 
de Fun et de l'autre, 
a l'un et a l'autre. 



Fern, 
l'une et l'autre, both. 
de Tune et de l'autre, of both. 
a l'une et a l'autre, to both. 



9 PLURAL. 

Masc. Fern, 

les uns et les autres, les unes et les autres, both. 

des uns et des autres, des unes et des autres, of both. 

aux uns et aux autres, aux unes et aux autres, to both. 

N. B. The pupil will notice the repetition of the preposition in the 
French pronoun. 

* Remark. — Both is translated by torn deux, masc, and toutes 
deux, fern., when it means two together, or at the same time. 



98 ELEMENTARY 

Vun ou P autre is declined thus ; 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. Fern. 

l'un ou Pautre, l'une ou l'autre, either. 

de l'un ou de l'autre, de l'une ou de l'autre, of either. 

a l'un ou a l'autre, a l'une ou a l'autre, to eitJier. 

PLURAL. 

Masc. Fern, 

les uns ou les autres, les unes ou les autres, either. 

des uns ou des autres, des unes ou des autres, of eitlier. 

aux uns ou aux autres, aux unes ou aux autres, to either. 

Ni Pun ni Pautre is declined thus : 

SINGULAR. « 

Masc. Fern, 

ni l'un ni l'autre, ni l'une ni l'autre, neither. 

ni de l'un ni de l'autre, ni de l'une ni de l'autre, of neither 

ni a l'un ni a l'autre, ni a l'une ni a l'autre, to neither. 

PLURAL. 

Masc. Fem. 

ni les uns ni les autres, ni les unes ni les autres, neither. 

ni des uns ni des autres, ni des unes ni des autres, ofntitlier. 

ni aux uns ni aux autres, ni aux unes ni aux autres, to neither. 

Exercise 89. 
Every thing is not lost. None of your sisters will come. "We 
shall not see any of them to-day. The other farmers. The money 
of the others. Each man. Each of the men. Take either of these 
oranges. I wish neither of them. None of the books which you 
have pleases me. Of all these apples, not one is yet ripe. Nobody 
speaks to me of it. I am not speaking to any body. Where are 
John and Stephen? Lewis receives money from both. I have 
written to both, but neither has answered my letters. Several have 
spoken to me of it. Those physicians 1 speak well of one another. 
The lawyer to whom you are writing is not at home. 

Exercise 90. 
Do not look at each other's copy-books. Somebody has been (yenu) 
here to-day, who wished to speak to you. Nobody likes that carpet. 
Take some of these snow-drops. Give me a few of them. Mary 
and Lucy are both in the garden. We love them both. Where is 
our little dog? He cannot be found. Has anybody asked to see 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 99 

me? Everybody knows it. You will be expected at your uncle's. 
Not one of joxl has yet given me her exercise. "We see nothing. You 
may have either of those pens. Which is the smallest of the north- 
ern states? You have not done anything to-day. ^ > 

Vocabulary. / 



Busy, 


occupe 


' Praise, verb, * louer. (3) 


Fall, verb, 


tomber. (3) 


Property, bien, m. 


Evening, 


soir, m. 


Only, alone, adj. seul. 


Morning, 


matin, m. 


Week, semaine, i 



Exercise 91. 
Show me your books, and I will see whether I have read any of 
them. What shall I buy? Which season do you prefer? What is 
a city? Have you seen the bookseller Edward was speaking of? 
Which one? The one whose daughter you know very well; but 
whose name I do not know. Lucy is not at home, she is at her 
sister's. Send her the letter you are reading. What is the carpenter 
saying? He says he will not be able to do what you wish this 
week. The children were running after one another, and both fell. 

Exercise 92. 
Which cloak shall I bring you? The cloth one or the silk one? 
Will you wear your new hat or your old one ? The oak of (avec) 
which that chair is made, is very beautiful. Sit by me; I cannot 
hear what you say. Whose letter is this ? Lend me your penknife. 
Which one? Is this one yours? Name the western states. No 
other man. Do not take the property of others. He says nothing. 
Do you know whether the letters have been received, that were ex- 
pected this morning? They have not been received yet. He only 
knows my motives. 

Exercise 93. 
People are looking at you. Does any one of you wish to go with 
me to the city? In which continent is Africa? Take some flowers 
to each of thy sisters. W 7 e shall often write letters to one another. 
My uncle is in Europe. (See § 7.) Our parents will go to America 
on the second of June, and they will return to Europe on the 22d 
of December. Whoever knows Mary, loves her. Somebody knocks 
at the door. Every one says so, (le.) Each one of these books. 



100 ELEMENTARY 

SECT. III. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS ALWAYS FOLLOWED BY QUE 

S79. — Whoever, whosoever, \ - ^ r .' 

y I qui que^efut qui. 

Whoever, before the verb to be, qui que. 

Whomever, whomsoever, ] . „ ^ ue ' 

( qui que cefut que. 

Whatever, quoi que. 

fwhen placed before f?uel que, masc. sing, 
the verb to be, and I quelle que, fem. sing, 
relating to a noun ] miP J Q n/ilo , 

that follows it, \ quels que, m^^r. 

Lquelles que, fem. plur. 

( when followed by a \ miplm.o ~„ „ 

Whatever, \ noun, placed before I ^ ue ' - ■ ?^> S1 <^ 

( que, J quelques . . . que, plur 

r when immediately } auelque . . . que. 
However, < followed by an ad- > 2 

( jective or an adverb ) t0ut ' ■ • ^ ue ' 

All the above pronouns except tout . . . que require the verb 
which follows them to be in the subjunctive mood. 

Examples. 
Whoever may speak to me. 
Qui que ce soit qui me parle. 
Whoever would speak of it. 
Qui que ce fut qui en parldt. 
Whoever you may be. 
Qui que vous soyez. 
Whomsoever I may receive. 
Qui que ce soit queje regoive. 
Whatever you may say. 
Quoi que vous disiez. 
Whoever these men may be. 
Quels que so lent ces homines. 
Whatever talents he may have. 
Quelques talents qu'il ait. 
However great they may be. 
Quclquc grands qu'ils soient } or 
To u t (jra )K Is q u ' lis son t. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 101 

Exercise 94, 

Whoever may laugh. Whatever Lucy may send. Whomsoever 
I. may see. Whoever these boys may be. Whatever friends they 
may have. However pretty she may be. Whoever would beat 
the dog. However large he may be. Whoever those women may 
be. Whomsoever you may know. Whatever lessons they may have. 
Whatever you may do. However rich his father may be. Whatever 
he may say, I will not believe him. Both shall go with me. Nei- 
ther is in the garden. Shall I call your mother or aunt ? Call either. 
For what is she coming? They alone do what I wish. What is 
the mind? 

Exercise 95. 

Whoever is guilty shall be punished. Have you nothing to say to 
me? In which continent is North America? Of whom is Lucy 
speaking ? What is she giving to the old woman ? With what are 
you writing? He is praised, he is blamed, he is punished, but what- 
ever they do, he is always lazy. Whatever advantages my sister 
may have had. However faithful their friends may have been. What- 
ever may be the evils of this life. Whoever asks for me, tell him 
that I am busy. He applies himself to nothing whatever. What is 
beauty ? A flower, that soon fades (se fane?) 

9* 



I 



102 ELEMENTARY 

PARTICIPLES. 

Remark. — The most important rules for the French Participle are so 

n to the beginner in translating from English into French, 

thai it is thought best to insert them, even in this elementary work. 

i other rules for the participles, in addition to the ones here 

. which the pupil will find in any French grammar. 

§ SO. — Rule. 1st. The Past Participle, when not preceded by 
;ni auxiliary verb, agrees in gender and number with the noun 
or pronoun to which it refers; as, The letter written by her, La 
Litre icritepar elle. 

Rule 2d. The Past Participle, when preceded by the auxiliary 
veil) to be, agrees in gender and number with the noun or pro- 
noun which is the nominative of the verb ; as, They are followed, 
lis sont suivis. 

Rule 3d. The Past Participle, when preceded by the auxiliary 
verb to have, agrees in gender and number w r ith the direct 
object of the verb, when, and only when, the said object is, in 
the French sentence, placed before the verb; as, The letters 
which 1 have written, Les lettres quefai ecrites. 

Rule 4th. The Past Participles of reflected verbs, w T hich are 
conjugated w T ith the auxiliary verb to be, follow Rule 3d ; as, 
They have repented, lis se sont repentis. 

Vocabulary. 



Build, latir. (4) 

Complain, u plaindre. (19) 

ad, di/endre. (7) 

loy, occuper. (3) 

In. In! indulgent 



Mistake, faute, f. 

Show, verb, montrer. (3) 



Subject, noun, sujet, m. 
Thank, remercier. (3) 

Window, fenetre, f. 

Here is, here are, void. 

There is, there arej voild. 

ii, — hen are, — behold) and voild, there is, — there 
ire used in pointing out objects. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 103 

Exercise 96. 

A letter well written. A horse beaten by a man. The translation 
is well written. Those houses are very well built. My brother has 
written a letter. My sister has written a letter. My brothers have 
written a letter. There is the letter he has written. Do you wish 
to see the letter she has written? You can see the letter they have 
written. Her brother was punished. The boys will be punished. 
My sister is come at last, (enjin.') She had employed herself. The 
boys have shown themselves very courageous. The men have de- 
fended themselves. 

Exercise 97. 

He has seen us. These letters are well written. My brother has 
made a mistake. Here is the mistake he has made. My sister has 
made a mistake. Here is the mistake she has made. Where is the letter 
I have given him ? I have eaten a peach. The peach that you have 
eaten, and the strawberries that I have eaten. Has she given you 
any money ? Has your mother sold her house ? Which house has she 
sold? What gowns has she bought? She is loved by (de) her sub- 
jects. Mary has repented of her fault. The girls found (comp. pres.} 
themselves sick. 

Exercise 98. 

The lesson which John has studied ten times. The lessons that 
William has studied. The lesson that my sisters have studied. Your 
father has shown himself very indulgent. My sisters have found 
themselves very happy. She has applied herself to her lessons. The 
little boys had employed themselves. Have you any of those oranges 
that you showed (comp. pres.) me the other day ? I have lost my 
watch. I have not found it. I have found a watch. It is not the 
one which I have lost. I have sent thee a letter. I have not re- 
ceived it. 

Exercise 99. 

My daughter has employed herself all the day, (journee, f.) The 
boys have dressed themselves. Has John thanked my sisters ? He 
has thanked them. He has thanked her. She has thanked him. 
Edward has warmed himself. Lucy has washed herself. Let us 
dress ourselves. The children have warmed themselves. Have the 



104 ELEMENTARY 

girls warmed themselves? Apply thyself to thy studies. Apply 
to your friends. This is good, but that is much better. My mother 
found herself (camp, pres.) better. 

Exercise 100. 

Has she washed her hands? She has washed them. 

RemarJc.—ThQ pupil must bear in mind that in such sentences as 
the preceding, the reflected pronoun is the indirect object, and the 
noun or pronoun denoting the part of the body spoken of, is the 
direct object. The sentences given above are translated into French 
thus: 

S'est-elle lave les mains? 
Literally, Has she washed the hands to herself? 

Elle se les est lavees. 
Literally, She has washed them to herself. 

The Past Participle follows Rule 3d. 

William has warmed his feet. Did he burn them ? Lucy has 
warmed her feet. Did she not burn her hand ? She has burned 
her fingers. You will burn your hair, if you sit so near the lamp. 
She has washed her face. He has washed his face. How many 
(comhien de) gold pens have you? I have three. Each one of these 
pens is bad. Every body is busy. All the water has been drunk. 
There is no truth in that history. The histories that I have read. 
Have I returned to you all the books you have lent me ? 

Exercise 101. 

N.B. See page 81, and the verbs Y Avoir and Falloir in the 
Appendix. 

I must sleep. Thou must read. He must walk. You must fol- 
low your sister. Mary must study her lesson. William must read 
the book twice. It will be necessary for us to give some money to 
the poor woman. I have given her some bread and beef. The 
queeo must sell her jewels. There is her palace. There is a bird 
mi that tree. There is no coffee. Is there any tea? We must 
punish the wicked boys. John must drink water. Is there any 
milk OD the table? Here is some milk. 



FRENCH EXERCISES, 



105 



Exercise 102. 
N.B. See the Remarks on Devoir, pages 140 and 145. 
I owe three dollars to the baker. I am to call at his house this 
evening. We should pay promptly (promptement) what we owe. 
You ought to have paid him yesterday. It has been necessary to 
sell the horses and carriage.' Children must sleep eight hours. 
Thou must write thy letter. Edward has dressed himself quickly. 
He must take his sister to school. The lamp which you have lighted. 
William must return to France (§ 7) to-morrow. Thou must employ 
thyself all the morning, (matinee, f.) 

Exercise 103. 
N.B. See the Remarks on To Be, page 145. 
How is thy mother? She is very well to-day. How old is that 
child? He is six years old. He will be seven the first of next 
month. He is sleepy and hungry. Each flower, each tree, has a 
lesson written on its leaves. I like this, but I do not like that 
Why do you warm your hands? There is what you wish. There 
are several boys in the garden. Here are some raspberries. Mary 
must wash her gloves. Is there no sugar in the house ? Are there 
no strawberries in the dish ? Do not eat too many apples. I have 
eaten two. Those that I eat (comp. pres.) were ripe. Do you take 
tea or coffee ? I take neither. Shall I give you plums or peaches ? 
You may give me both. Are you afraid of this horse or of that 
one? 

Vocabulary. 

Dictionary, dictionnaire, m. Pay, payer. (3) 

England, Angleterre, f. Pl av > jouer. (3) 

France, France, f. Prevent, prevents. (61) 

Help, verb, aider. (3) Rarely, rarement. 

Exercise 104. 

N.B. See the Remarks on Would, Might, Could, &c, on pages 140 

and 141. 

I would call at the bookseller's, if I could; but I am to be at the 
physician's at eleven o'clock. (hours) I will lend you my dictionary, 
that you may write your exercise this evening. You might do it in 



100 ELEMENTARY, ETC. 

naif an hour, (une dcmi-hcure) If I could have done it, I would 
not have linked (jprii) you to help me. You might have done it 
as well as I. I could not have done it so (si) soon. Mary is to 
come here soon. We are to go to my aunt's to-morrow. Was not 
Lucy to pay two dollars? She ought not to have bought that hand- 
kerchief. She owes nothing. She is not to pay anything. 
Exercise 105. 
We must not be lazy. I must see that man. Thou must not go 
alone. He must come himself. Your brother must go with you. 
Stephen owed the bookseller five dollars, and he was to receive the 
value in books. Are thy sisters gone? How are they? Do they 
wish me to write to them ? William would do it, I know, if you 
would tell him that it is for me. What will you have? May we study 
our lessons now, and play this evening? It is very fine weather. 
Is it not too cold? It is cold, but it is not too cold. Is not the 
child cold? He is hungry, but he is not cold. 

Remark. — Adverbs are generally placed, in French, imme- 
diately after the verb. When the verb is used in a compound 
tense, the adverb is placed between the auxiliary and the par- 
ticiple ; as, 

They write their letters badly, lis Scrivent MAL leurs lettres. 

They have written badly, lis out MAL ecrit. 

Exercise 106. 

Mary writes her exercises well. Do we not always say the truth ? 

We often call at my cousin's. I never drink wine. Have we not 

dressed ourselves quickly? My niece has blamed herself too much. 

Were we to pay a dollar? I will not receive a cent from you. I 

your brother. He would eat the pine-apple ; I could not 

prevent him. .May 1 read with you the history of England and that 

of I He rarely goes to your uncle's. Would he have gone 

home without me? How is the weather? It is warm, and it will 

be warmer to-morrow. Are you not warm? I am warm and thirsty. 

B. At the end of the Appendix will be found a few pages of 

. which the pupil will be able to translate into French easily, 

with the help of a French dictionary 



APPENDIX. 



CONJUGATION OF FRENCH VERBS. 

There are four conjugations or classes of verbs. 

Verbs of the first conjugation have the infinitive mood, pre- 
sent tense, ending in ER. 

Verbs of the second conjugation have the infinitive mood, 
present tense, ending in IR. 

Verbs of the third conjugation have the infinitive mood, 
present tense, ending in OIR. 

Verbs of the fourth conjugation have the infinitive mood, 
present tense, ending in RE. 

The primitive tenses of verbs are those from which the 
others are formed ; they are five in number, and are, 

The present of the infinitive mood, ~ 

The present participle, 

The past participle, 

The present of the indicative mood, 

And the preterite of the indicative mood. 
.(10?) 



108 



ELEMENTARY 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB 
AVOIR, TO HAVE. 

INFINITIVE. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 




COMPOUND TENSES. 


Avoir, 


PRESENT. 

to have. 




PAST. 

Avoir eu, to have had 






PARTICIPLES. 


Ayant, 
Eu, m. eue, 


PRESENT. 

having. 

PAST. 

f. had. 


COMPOUND. 

> Ayant eu, having had, 
INDICATIVE. 

PRETERIT INDEFINITE, OV COMPOUND OF THE 


PRESENT. 


PRESENT. 


J'ai, 
Tu as, 
11 a, 
Elle a, 


I have. 

thou hast, 
he has. 
she has. 


J'ai eu, I have had. 
Tu as eu, thou hast had. 
11 a eu, he has had. 
Elle a eu, she has had. 


Nous avons 
Vous avez, 
lis ont, 
Elles ont, 


we have, 
you have, 
theym. have, 
they f. have. 


Nous avons eu, ive have had. 
Vous avez eu, you have had. 
lis ont eu, they have had. 
Elles ont eu, they have had. 



IMPERFECT. 

J'avais, I had. 

Tu avais, thou hadst. 

II or elle avait, he or she had. 

Nous avions, we had. 

Vous aviez, you had. 

lis or elles ) , 7 7 -, 

avaieut, } ** liad ' 



PLUPERFECT, OV COMPOUND OF THE 
IMPERFECT. 



J' avais eu, 

Tu avais eu, 

II or elle avait eu, 

Nous avions eu 

Vous^aviez eu, 

lis or elles avaient eu, 



I had had. 
thou hadst had. 
he or she had had. 
ive had had. 
you had had. 
they had had. 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

I had. 
thou hadst. 
he had. 

we //'id. 

you had. 

they had. 



Pens, 
'I'ii eus, 
Jl or elle eut, 

Voui 

[la or elles 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, Or COMPOUND 
OF T1IE PRETERIT. 



ePeus eu, 
Tu eus eu, 
II or elle eut eu, 
Nous cumes eu, 
Yous cCites eu, 
lis or Hies 
eurent eu, 



I had had. 
thou hadst had. 
he or she had had, 
we had had. 
you had had. 
they had had. 



FEENCH EXERCISES. 



109 







COMPOUND OF THE FUTURE, OT 


FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 


FUTURE ANTERIOR. 


J'aurai, 


I shall 


J'aurai eu, 


/ shall have 




have. 




had. 


Tu auras, 


thou wilt 


Tu auras eu, 


thou wilt have 




have. 




had. 


11 or elle aura 


, he or she 


11 or elle aura eu, 


he or she will 




will have. 




have had. 


Nous aurons, 


we shall 


Nous aurons eu, 


we shall have 




have. 




had. 


Vouz aurez, 


you will 


Yous aurez eu, 


you will have 




have. 




had. 


lis or elles 


they will 


lis or elles 


they will have 


auront, 


have. 


auront eu, 
CONDITIONAL. 


had. 






PAST, Or COMPOUND OF THE CONDI- 


PRESENT. 


TIONAL. 


«P aurais, 


I should 
have. 


J' aurais eu, 


I should have had- 


Tu aurais, 


thou shouldst 


Tu aurais eu, 


thou sJwuldst have 




have. 




had. 


11 or elle 


he or she 


11 or elle aurait 


he or she should 


aurait, 


should have. 


eu, 


have had. 


Nous aurions, 


we should 
have. 


Nous aurions eu, 


we should have had* 


Vous auriez, 


you should 
have. 


Yous auriez eu, 


you should havehad. 


lis or elles 


they should 


lis or elles aurai- 


they should have had. 


auraient, 


have. 


ent eu, 
IMPERATIVE. 






Aie, 


Have 


(thou.) 




Ayons, 


let us 


have. 




Ayez, 


have 
SUBJUNCTIVE. 


(ye or you.) 


PRESENT OR FUTURE. 


PRETERIT, Or COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. 


Que j'aie, 


That I may 


Que j'aie eu, 


That I may have 




have. 




had. 


Que tu aies, 


that thou 


Que tu aies eu, 


that thou maysthave 




may st have. 




had. 


Qu'il or qu'- 


that he may 


Qu'il or qu'elle ait 


that he or she may 


elle ait, 


have. 


eu, 


have had. 


Que nous 


that we may 


Que nous ayons eu, 


that we may have 


ayons, 


have. 




had. 


Que vous 


that you may 


Que vous ayez eu, 


thai you may have 


ayez, 


have. 




had. 


Qu'ils or qu' 


that they ma 


Qu'ils or qu'elles 


that they may have 


elles aient, 


have. 


aient eu, 


had. 


10 









110 



ELEMENTARY 



IMPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse, That I might 

have. 
Que tu eusses, that thou 

mightst have. 
Qu'il or qu'elle that he or she 
eut, might have. 

Que nous eus- that we might 

sions, have. 

Que vous eus- that you might 



siez, 
Qu'ils or qu'- 
elles eussent, 



have, 
that they might 
have. 



PLUPERFECT, Or COMPOUND OF THE 
IMPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse eu, That I might have 

had. 
Que tu eusses eu, that thou mightst 

have had. 



Qu'il or qu'elle 

eut eu, 
Que nous eus- 

sions eu, 
Que vous eus- 

siez eu, 



that he or she 

might have had. 
that we might have 

had. 
that you might 

have had. 



Qu'ils or qu'elles that they might 
eussent eu, have had. 



AVOIR, TO HAVE, 
CONJUGATED NEGATIVELY. 
N. B. The first persons on\f of the tenses are given ; the pupil will 
learn the others from the preceding verb, which has been conjugated in 
full. 



Infinitive Present, 

Comp. Inf. Pres., 
Present Participle, 
Comp. Pres. Part., 
Indicative Present, 
Comp. Indie. Pres., 
In (he. Imperfect, 
Comp. Indie. Imp., 
Indie. Preterite, 
Comp. Indie. Pret., 
I a die. Future, 
( 'omp. Indie. Fut., 
Conditional Pres., 
Past, 

Imperative, 

Subjunctivt Present, 
Comp, Subj, Pres. % 
Subjunctive Tmj 

Imp., 



N'avoir pas, or 
Ne pas avoir, 
N'avoir pas eu, 
N'ayant pas, 
N'ayant pas eu, 
Je n'ai pas, 
Je n'ai pas eu, 
Je n'avais pas, 
Je n'avais pas eu, 
Je n'eus pas, 
Je n'eus pas eu, 
Je n'aurai pas, 
Je n'aurai pas eu, 
Je n'aurais pas, 
Je n'aurais pas eu, 

N'aie pas, 

N'uyons pas, 

N'ayez pas, 
Que je n'aie pas, 



< not to have. 

not to have had, 

not having. 

not having' had. 

I have not. 

I have not had. 

I had not. 

I had not had, 

I had not. 

I had not had. 

I shall not have. 

I shall not have had. 

I should not hare, 

I should not have had. 
do thou not have, 
let us not have, 
have not (you.) 

That I may not have. 
Que je n'aie pas eu, That I may not have had. 
Que je a'eusse pas, That I might not have. 
Que je n'eusse pas Thai 1 might not have 
eu, had. 



TRENCH EXERCISES. 



Ill 



AVOIR, TO HATE, 

CONJUGATED INTERROGATIVELY. 

N. B. As a question can not be asked in the Infinitive, Imperative, or 
Subjunctive mood, an interrogative verb does not possess those moods. 

INDICATIVE. 



Ai-jel 

As-tu ! 
A-t-il I 
A-t-elle ! 
Avons-nous ? 
Avez-vous ? 
Ont-ils ? 
Ont-elles ? 



PRESENT. 

have I? 
hast thou ? 
has he? 
has she? 
have we ? 
have you ? 

i have they ? 



COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. 



Ai-je eu ? 
As-tu eu ? 
A-t-ii eu ? 
A-t-elle eu ? 
Avons-nous eu ? 
Avez-vous eu ? 
Ont-ils eu ? 
Ont-elles eu? 



Imperfect, 
Comp. Imp., 
Preterit, 
Comp. Pret., 
Future, 

Comp. Future, 
Conditional Pres., 
Cond. Past, 



Avais-je ? 
Avais-je eu ? 
Eus-je ? 
Eus-je eu ? 
Aurai-je ? 
Aurai-je eu ? 
Aurais-je ? 
Aurais-je eu ? 



have I had ? 
hast thou had/ 
has he had ? 
has she had ? 
have we had ? 
have you had ? 

\ har.P. thfii hnrl? 



have they had? 



had I? 
had I had ? 
had I? 
had I had ? 
shall I have ? 
shall I have had? 
should I have ? 
should I have had? 



CONJUGATED 

Present, 
Comp. Present, 
Imperfect, 
Comp. Imperf 
Preterit, 
Comp. Pret., 
Future, 
Comp, Future, 
Conditional Pres., 
Cond. Past., 



+ AVOIR, 

INTERROGATIVELY AND 
N'ai-je pas ! 
N'ai-je pas eu? 
N'avais-je pas ? 
N'avais-je pas eu ? 
N'eus-je pas ? 
N'eus-je pas eu ? 
N'aurai-je pas? 
N'aurai-je pas eu ? 
N'aurais-je pas ? 
N'aurais-je pas eu? 



NEGATIVELY. 
have I not ? 
have I not had? 
had I not ? 
had I not had ? 
had I not ? 
had I not had? 
shall I not have ? 
shall I not have had? 
should I not hove? 
should I not h.ave, 
had ? 



112 



ELEMENTARY 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB 
ETRE, TO BE. 



Etre, 

Etant, 
Ete, 



SIMPLE TENSES. 
PRESENT. 



PRESENT. 
PAST. 



INFINITIVE. 



to be. 



Avoir ete, 



COMPOUND TENSES. 
PAST. 



to have been 



PARTICIPLES. 

being. 



COMPOUND. 



:i 



Ayant ete, 



been, 
INDICATIVE. 



having leen* 



Je suis, 
Tu es, 
II est, 

Nous sommes, 
Vous etes, 
lis sont, 



1 am. 

thou art. 
he is. 

we are. 
you are. 
they are. 



PRETERITE INDEFINITE, Or COMPOUND 
OF THE PRESENT. 

I have been. 

thou hast been. 

he has been. 



Pai ete, 
Tu as ete, 
II a ete, 

Nous avons ete, 
Vous avez ete, 
Us ont ete, 



we have been, 
you have been, 
they have been. 



IMPERFECT. 



Petals, 
Tu etais, 
II etait, 

Nous etions, 
Vous etiezj 
lis etaient, 



I ivas. 

thou wast. 

he was. 

we were. 

you were, 
they were. 



PLUPERFECT Or COMPOUND OF THE 
IMPERFECT. 



Pavais ete, 
Tu avais ete, 
II avait ete, 

Nous avions ete, 
Vous aviez ete, 
lis avaient ete, 



/ had been* 

thou hadst been. 

he had been. 

we had been. 
you had been. 
they had been, 



Je fas, 

'I'll ins, 

11 lilt, 

Nous flumes, 
Vous flutes, 
Us furent, 



PRETERIT DEFINITE, 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 0)' COMPOUND OF 
THE PRETERIT. 



I was. 

thou was/. 

he was. 


Peus et£, 
Tu eus gte, 
11 eut ete, 


I had been. 

thou hadst been. 

he had been. 


we were* 
^ou were, 
they were. 


Nous ei imos etei 
Vous elites et6, 
lis eurent ete, 


we had been, 
you had been 

(hey had been 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 



113 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

Je serai, i" shall be. 

Tu seras, . thou wilt be. 

11 sera, he will be. 



Nous serons, 
Vous serez, 
lis seront, 



we shall be. 
you will be. 
they ivill be. 



COMPOUND OF THE FUTURE, GT 
FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

J'aurai ete, I shall have been* 

Tu auras ete, thou wilt have been. 
II aura ete, he will have been. 

Nous aurons ete, we shall have been. 
Vous aurez ete, you will have been. 
lis auront ete, they will have been* 



CONDITIONAL. 



Je serais, 
Tu serais, 

I] serait, 
Nous serions, 

Vous seriez, 

lis seraient, 



I should be. 
thou shouldst be. 

he should be. 
we should be. 

you should be. 

they should be. 



PAST, Or COMPOUND OF THE CONDI- 
TIONAL. 

J'aurais ete, I should have been. 

Tu aurais ete, thou shouldst have 

been. 
II aurait ete, he should have been. 

Nous aurions ete, we should have 

been. 



Vous auriez ete, 
Us auraient ete, 



you should have 

been, 
they should have 
been. 



IMPERATIVE. 

Sois, Be {thou). 

Soyons, Let us be. 

Soyez, Be {ye or you.) 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



PRESENT Or FUTURE. 

Que^je sois, that I may be. 

Que tu sois, that thou mayst be. 

Qu'il soit, that he may be. 

Que nous soyons, that we may be. 

Que vous soyez, that you may be. 

Qu'ils soient, that they may be. 



PRETERIT, Or COMPOUND OF THE 
PRESENT. 

Que j'aie ete, that I may have 

been. 
Que tu aies ete, that thou mayst 

have been. 
Qu'il ait ete, that he may have been. 

Que nous ayons ete, that we may 
have been. 

Que vous ayez ete, that you may 
have been. 

Qu'ils aient ete, that they may have 

been. 



114 



ELEMENTARY 



IMPERFECT. 

Que je fusse, that I might be. 

Que tu fusses, that thou mightst be. 
Qu'il fut, that he might be. 

Que nous fussions, that we might be. 
Que vous fussiez, that you might be. 
Qu'ils fussent, that they might be. 



PLUPERFECT, OT COMPOUND OF THE 
IMPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse ete, that I might have 

been. 

Que tu eusses ete, that thou mightst 
have been. 

Qu'il eut ete, that he might have 

been. 

Que nous eussions ete, that we might 
have been. 

Que vous eussiez ete, that you might 
have been. 

Qu'ils eussent ete, that they might 
have been. 



ETRE, TO BE, 

CONJUGATED NEGATIVELY. 

INFINITIVE. 

PRESENT. TAST. 

Ne pas etre, not to be. | N'avoir pas ete, not to have been. 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. COMFOUND. 

N'etant pas, not being. | N'ayant pas ete, not having been. 



PRESENT. 

Je ne suis pas, 

Tu n'es pas, 

II n'est pas, 

Nous ne sommes pas, 

Vous n'etes pas, 

lis ne sont pas, 

Imperfect, 

Com p. Imp., 
Preterit, 
( '(>/»}). Prct., 
Future, 

Comp. Future, 
( Conditional Pres., 
•I. Patt, 



INDICATIVE. 

PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

/ am not. Je n'ai pas ete, / have not been. 

thou art not, Tu n'as pas ete, thou hast not been. 

he is not. II n'a pas ete, he has not been. 

we are not. Nous n'avons pas ete, we have not 

been. 
Vous n'avez pas ete, you have not 

be%\. 
lis n'ont pas ete, they have not been. 

I was not. 
I had not been. 
I was not. 
I had not been. 
1 shall not be. 
I shall not have been 
I should nut be. 
1 should ?ivt have 
been. 



you are not* 

they are not. 
Je n'etais pas, 
Je n'avais pas ete, 
Je ne fus pas, 
Je n'eus pas c'te, 
Je ne serai pas, 
Je n'aurai pas £te, 
Je ne serais pis, 
Je a'aurais pas ete, 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 



115 



Imperative, 

Subjunctive Pres., 
Comp. Subj. Present, 
Subjunctive Imperfect, 
Comp. Subj. Imp., 



Ne sois pas, be ,hou not. 

Ne soy on s pas, let us not be. 

Ne soyez pas, be ye not. 

Que je ne sois pas, that I may net be. 

Que je n'aie pas ete, that I may not have been. 

Que je ne fusse pas, that I might not be. 

Que je n'eusse pas that I might not have 
ete, heen. 

ETRE, TO BE, 

CONJUGATED INTERROGATIVELY. 

INDICATIVE. 



PRESENT. 




COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. 


Suis-je ? 


am I? 


Ai-je ete ? 


have I been ? 


Es-tu 1 


art thou ? 


As-tu ete 1 


hast thou been ? 


Est-il ? 


is he? 


A-t-il ete ? 


has he been ? 


Est-elle? 


is she ? 


A-t-elle ete? 


has she been ? 


Sommes-nous? 


are we ? 


Avons-nous ete 1 have ice been ? 


Etes-vous ? 


are you ? 


Avez-vous ete 1 have you been ? 


Sont-ils 1 | 




Ont-ils ete ? 


) 

J have they been? 


Sont-elles ] J 


are they ? 


Ont-elles ete 


Imperfect, 


Etais-je 1 


was I ? 


Comp. Imp., 


Avais-je ete ? 


had I been ? 


Preterit, 


Fus-je ] 


ivas I? 


Comp. Pret. K 


Eus-je ete ? 


had I been ? 


Future, 


Serai-je 7 


shall I be? 


Comp. Future, 


Aurai-je eie 1 


shall I have been ? 


Conditional Pres., 


Serais-je ! 


should I be ? 


Cond. Past, 


Aurais-je ete 1 

ETRE, TO BE, 


should I have been ? 


CONJUGATED 


INTERROGATIVELY AND 


NEGATIVELY. 


Present, 


Ne suis-je pas ? 


am I not ? 


Comp. Present, 


N'ai-je pas ete 1 


have I not been ? 


Imperfect, 


N' etais-je pas 1 


was I not ? 


Comp. Imperf, 


N'avais-je pas ete, 


had I not been ? 


Preterit, 


Ne fus-je pas 7 


was I not ? 


Comp. Pret., 


N'eus-je pas ete ? 


had I not been? 


Future, 


Ne serai-je pas? 


shall I not be ? 


Comp. Future, 


N'aurai-je pas ete 1 


shall I not have been ? 


Cmditional Pres., 


Ne serais-je pas! 


should I not be? 


Cond. Past., 


N'aurais^ 


e pas ete T 


ihoidd I not have been ? 



116 



ELEMENTARY 



N. B. Before learning the following Verbs, let the pupil study the 
remarks on the Comparison between the Tenses of English verbs and the 
Tenses of French Verbs, pages 135, loft, &c. 

FIRST CONJUGATION IN ER. 
PORTER. 



Porter, 

Portant, 
Porte, 



SIMPLE TENSES. 
PRESENT. 



TRESENT. 
PAST. 



INFINITIVE. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



to carry, 

PARTICIPLES, 

carrying. 



Avoir porte, to have tamed. 



carrying, J 

* l Ay 

carried. 3 



COMPOUND. 

ant porte, having carried. 



INDICATIVE. 



Je porte, 
Tu portes, 
II porte, 

Nous portons, 
Vouz portez, 
Us portent, 



I carry. 

thou carriest. 

he carries. 

we carry, 
you carry, 
they carry. 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE, OT COMPOUND 
OF THE PRESENT. 



J'ai porte, 
Tu as porte, 
II a porte, 



1 have carried. 

thou hast carried. 

he has earned. 



Nous avons porte, we have carried. 
Vous avez porte, you have carried. 
Us ont porte, they have carried. 



IMPERFECT. 



Je porta is, 
Tu portais, 
II portait, 

Nous portions, 
Vous portiez, 
lis portaient, 



I iv as carrying. 

thou wast carrying. 

he was carrying. 

we ivere carrying. 
you were carry inn. 
they were carrying. 



f PLUPERFECT, Or COMPOUND OF THE 
IMPERFECT. 

J'avais porte, / had carried. 

Tu avais porte, thou hadst earned. 
II avait porte, he had carried. 

Nous avions porte, we had carried. 
Vous aviez porte, you had carried. 
lis avaient porte, they had carried. 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 



Je portal, 
Tu portas, 
II porta, 

Nous portames, 
Vous portates. 

Us porterent, 



I carried. 

thou corriedst. 

h> carried. 

we carried. 

you carnal. 

they carried. 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, Or COMPOUND OF 
THE PRETERIT. 

Peiis porte, I had carried. 

Tu eus porte, thou hadst carried. 
II eut. porte, he had earned. 

Nous eiuncs porte, un had carried. 
Vous efttes porte, you had carried. 
Us eurcnt porte, they had earned. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 



117 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 



Je porterai, 
Tu porteras, 
II portera, 

Nous porterons, 
Vous porterez, 
Us porteront, 



I shall carry. 

thou wilt carry. 

he will carry. 

we shall carry, 
you will carry. 
they will carry. 



COMPOUND OF THE FUTURE Or 
FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

J'aurai porte, I shall") 

Tu auras porte, 
II aura porte, 

Nous aurons porte, 
Vous aurez porte, 
lis auront porte, 



thou wilt 
he will 1 * 

we shall j J 
you iv ill I | 
they will J 



CONDITIONAL. 



Je porterais, 
Tu porterais, 
II porterait, 



I should carry. J'aurais porte, 



thou shouldst carry. 
he should carry. 

Nous porterions, we should carry. 
Vous porteriez, you should carry. 
Us portera ient, they should carry. 



PAST, Or COMPOUND OF THE CONDI- 
TIONAL. 

I should") 



Tu aurais porte, thou shouldst 
II aurait porte, he should ! d 

Nous aurions porte, we should 
Vous auriez porte, you should 
lis auraient porte, they should J 



IMPERATIVE. 

Porte, carry (thou.) 

Portons, let us carry. 

Portez, carry (ye.) 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 



PRESENT Or FUTURE. 

Que je porte, that lmay carry. 

Que tu portes, that thou may si carry. 

Qu'il porte, that he may carry. 

Que nous portions, that we may carry. 

Que vous portiez, that you may carry. 

Qu'ils portent, that they may carry. 



PRETERIT, Or COMPOUND OF THE 
PRESENT. 

Que j'aie porte, that lmay ^ 

Que tu aies porte, that thou 

mayst 
Qu'il ait porte, that he may 

Que nous ayons porte, that ice I I 
may 

Que vous ayez porte, that you 
may 

Qu'ils aient porte, that they may J 



IMPERFECT. 



PLUPERFECT, OT COMPOUND OF THE 
IMPERFECT. 



Que je portasse, 
Que tu porta sses, 
Qu'il portat, 

Que nous portassions, 
Que vous portassiez, 
Qu'ils portassent, 



that 7T ^ 

that thou I s, 

that he I •§. 



that we 



I § 



that you 
that they J ■ 



Que j'eusse porte, 
Que tu eusses porte, 
Qu'il eut porte, 



that 1 1 

that thou j 

that he j 



Que nous eussions porte, that u 
Que vous eussiez port 
Qu'ils eussent porte, 



Que vous eussiez porte, that you i J 
that they J ? 



118 ELEMENTARY 

REMARKS ON THE ORTHOGRAPHY OF SOME FRENCH 
VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 

1. In verbs ending in ger 9 the e is retained before a and o, in 
order to preserve the soft sound of the g. See manger, verb 66 
of the model verbs, mangeant, mangeons. 

2. The verbs which end in cer, take a cedilla before a and o, 
in order to preserve the soft sound of the c. See avancer, verb 
67, avancant, avan^ons, 

3. Those verbs ending in er which have their final syllable pre- 
ceded by e, (e close,) change this e into e (e open) before a mute 
syllable. See celer, verb 68, cele, celerai. 

4. Those verbs ending in er which have their final -syllable 
preceded by e, {e mute,) as lever, mener, change this e mute 
into e (e open) before a mute syllable. See mener, verb 69, 
mine. 

5. In verbs ending in eler, (the e before the I being unaccented, 
as appeler,) the I is doubled before a mute e. See appeler, verb 
70, appette. 

6. In verbs ending in eter, (the e before the t being unaccented, 
as jeter,) the t is doubled before a mute e. See jeter, verb 71, jette. 
Except acheter. 

7. Verbs ending in the present participle by iant, as prier, the 
present participle of which is priant, take double i in the first and 
second persons plural of the imperfect of the indicative, and 
present of the subjunctive ; as, nous priions, vous priiez, que nous 
priions, que vous priiez. 

8. Verbs ending in the present participle by ycint, as payer, 
the present participle of which is payant, take y and i in the first 
and second persons plural of the imperfect of the indicative, and 
the present of the subjunctive ; as, nous payions, vous payiez, que 
novs payions, que vous payiez. 

Also, these verbs change y into i before e mute. See essayer, 
verb 72, essaic. 



FRENCH EXE^OISES. 



119 



SECOND CONJUGATION IN IR. 
FINIR. 

INFINITIVE. 

Finir, 

PARTICIPLES. 



to finish* 



Finissant, 



Je finis, 
Tu finis, 
II finit, 

Nous finissons, 
Vous finissez, 
lis finissent, 



finishing. | Fini, 
INDICATIVE. 



I finish. 

thou finishest. 

he finishes. 

we finish, 
you finish, 
they finish. 



Je finissais, 
Tu finissais, 
II finissait, 

Nous finissions, 
Vous finissiez, 
lis finissaient, 



finished. 

IMPERFECT. 

I was finishing. 

thou wast finishing-. 

he was finishing. 



ice wei e finishing. 
you were finishing, 
they ic ere finishing. 



PRETERIT. 



FUTURE. 



Je finis, 
Tu finis, 
II finit, 

Nous finimes, 
Vous finites 
lis finirent, 



I finished. 

thou fini shed st. 

he finished. 

ice finished. 

you finished 

they finished. 



Je finirai, 
Tu finiras, 
II finira, 

Nous fin irons, 
Vous finirez, 
lis finiront, 



I shall finish. 

thou wilt finish. 

he will finish. 

ive shall finish, 
you will finish, 
they will finish. 



CONDITIONAL. 



IMPERATIVE. 



Je finirais, 
Tu finirais, 
11 finirait, 

Nous finirions, 
Vous finiriez, 
lit Iiniraient, 



I should finish. 

thou shouldst finish. 

he should finish. 

we should finish, 
you should finish, 
they should fimsn. 



Finis, 

Finissons, 
Finissez, 



finish {thou.) 

let us finish, 
finish [ye.) 



PRESENT. 

Que je finisse, that I may 

Que tu finisses, that thou mayst 
Qu'il finisse, that he may 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 

IMPERFECT. 

Que je finisse, thai I 'j 

Que tu finisses, thai thou 

Qu'il finit, that he 



Que nous finissions, that we may f 
Que vous finissiez, that you may | 
Qu'ils finissent, that they may J 



Que nous finissions, 
Que vous finissiez, 
Qu'ils finissent, 



that we 
that you \ 
*hat they J 






N. B. The Compound Tenses of the verb Finir, as well as of 
the two following verbs, are formed like those of the verb Porter. 



120 



ELEMENTARY 



PRESENT. 



THIRD COx\JUGATION IN OIR. 
RECEVOIR. 

INFINITIVE. 
Recevoir, 



to receive. 



PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

Recevant, receiving. | Recu, received. 



INDICATIVE. 



Je recois, 
Tu recois, 
II recoit, 

Nous recevons, 
Vous recevez, 
lis recoivent, 



I receive- 

thou receivest' 

he receives. 

ice receive, 
you receive, 
they receive. 



IM PERFECT. 

Je recevais, 1 was receiving. 

Tu recevais, thou ivast receiving. 
II recevait, he was receiving. 



Nous recevions, 
Vous receviez, 
Us recevaient, 



we were receiving, 
you were receiving. 
they were receiving. 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 



Je recus, 
Tu recus, 
II recut, 

Nous recuines, 
Vous recutes, 
Us recurent, 



I received, 

thou receivedst. 

he received. 

we received. 

you received. 

they received. 



Je recevrai, 
Tu recevras, 
II recevra, 

Nous recevrons, 
Vous recevrez, 
lis recevront, 



1 shall receive. 

thou wilt receive. 

he will receive 

we shall receive, 
you will receive, 
they will receive. 



CONDITIONAL. 

Je recevrais, I should receive.] 



IMPERATIVE. 



thou shouldst receive, 
lie should receive. 



Tu recevrais, 
II recevrait, 

Nous recevrions, we should receive, 
Vous recevriez, you should receive 
Us recevraient, they should receive. 



Recois, 



Recevons, 
Recevez, 



receive (thou.) 

let us receive, 
receive (ye.) 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



PRESENT. 

Quo je rccoive, that J may "] 

Que tu receives, thai thou mayst I 
Qu'il receive, that he may j 



Que nous recevions, that we may 
Que vous receviez, that you may 

Qu'ils recoivent, that they may ^ 



}-§• 



IMPERFECT. 



Que je recusse, 
Que tu recusses, 
Qu'il recut, 

Que nous recessions, 
Que vous regussiez, 
Qu'ils regussent, 



that 71 

that thou ! 

that he \ 

that we f 

that you i 

that they) 



FB.EXCH EXERCISES. 



121 



1*RES 



FOURTH CONJUGATION IN RE. 
RENDRE. 

INFINITIVE. 

Rendre, 



Rendant, 



PARTICIPLES. 

rendering. \ Rendu, 



to render 



rendered 



Je rends, 
Tu rends, 
II rend, 

Nous rendons, 
Vous rendez, 
lis rendent, 



INDICATIVE. 



I render. 

thou render est. 

he renders. 

ice render, 
you render, 
they render. 



IMPERFECT. 



Je rendais, 
Tu rendais, 
II rendait, 



1 was rendering. 

thou wast rendering. 

he ivas rendering. 



Nous rendions, ice were rendering. 
Vous rendiez, you were rendering. 
lis rendaient, they were rendering. 



PRETERIT. 



FUTURE. 



Je rendis, 
Tu rendts, 
II rendit, 

Nous rendimes, 
Vous rendites, 
lis rendirent, 



I rendered. 

thou renderedst. 

he rendered. 

we rendered, 
you rendered. 
they rendered. 



Je rendrai, 
Tu rendras, 
11 rendra, 

Nous rendrons, 
Vous rendrez, 
lis rendront, 



I shall render. 

thou wilt render. 

he will render. 

we shall render, 
you will render. 
they will render. 



CONDITIONAL. 

Je rendrais, 1 should render. 

Tu rendrais, thou shouldst render. 
11 rendrait, he should render. 

Nous rendrions, we should render. 
Vous rendriez, you should render. 
lis rendraient, they should render. 



IMPERATIVE. 



Rends, 

Rendons, 
Rendez, 



render (thou.) 

let us render, 
render (ye.) 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



PRESENT. 

Que je rende, that I may * 

Que tu rendes, that thou mayst 
Qu'il rende, that he may 

Que nous rendions, that we may 
Que vous rendiez, that you may 
Qu'ils rendent, that they may J 



>%> 



IMPERFECT. 

Que je rendisse, that I 

Que tu rendisses, that -thou 
Qu'il rendit, that he 



Que nous rendissions, that we 
Que vous rendissiez, that you 
Qu'ils rendissent, that they j 

11 



> 



3 



122 



ELEMENTARY 



CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB 
SE PROMENER. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
present. Se promener. 



Se promenant, 

Je me promene, 
Tu te promenes, 
II se promene, 

Nous nous promenons, 
Vous vous promenez, 
lis se promenent, 

Je me promenais, 

Je me promenai, 

Je me promenerai, 

Je me promenerais, 

Promene-toi, 

Promenons-nous, 

Promenez-vous, 

Que je me promene, 



PARTICIPLES. 



walking. \ Promene, 



to walk 



walked. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

/ walk, do walk, or am walking, 
thou walkest, <5fc, 
he walks, 6fc, 

we walk, <fyc. 

you walk, <5fc. 

they walk, <5fc. 
IMPERFECT. 

I was .walkings or walked. 
PRETERIT. 

I walked, or did walk. 
FUTURE. 

I shall or will walk. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

i" should or would walk. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

walk (thou.) 
let us walk. 
walk (ye or you-) 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

that I may walk. 

IMPERFECT. 



Que je me promenasse, 



that I might walk. 



N. B. The pupil car learn the other persons of the preceding tenses, 
by referring to the verb Porter. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 



123 



COMPOUND TENSES OF THE REFLECTED VERB 
SE PROMENER. 



Comp. Infin. Pres., 

" Pres. Part, 

" Indie, Pres., 

" " Imp., 

" " Pret., 

" " Fut., 

" Cond. Pres., 

M &w£;. Pres., 



S'etre promene, 
S'etant promene, 
Je me suis promene, 
Je m'etais promene, 
Je me fus promene, 
Je me serai promene, 
Je me serais promene, 
Que je me sois promene, 
Que je me fusse promene, 



to have Walked, 

lulling nulkcd. 

I have ivalked. 

I had walked, 

1 had walked. 

T shall have Walked, 

I should hare walked, 

that I may have walk' d. 

that I might hi 



CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB 
S'EN ALLER. 



PRESENT. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

S'en aller, 



PARTICIPLES. 

TRESENT. 

S'en allant, going away. \ En alle, 



to go a way. 



gone away. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 
Je m'en vais, I go away, do go away, or am going away. 

Tu t'en vas, thou goest away, dost go away, or art " 

II s'en va. he goes away, does go away, or is " 

Nous nous en allons, ice go away, do go away, or are 
Vous vous en allez, you go away, do go away, or arc 
lis s'en vont, they go away, do go away, or are 

IMPERFECT. 

Je m'en allais, I went auay, did go away, or wot 

Tu t'en allais, thouwentest away \ didst go away % otwd$i ' 

II s'en allait, he went away, did go away, or wt way. 

Nous nous en a.lions, we went away, did go away, 01 M i 

Vous vous en alliez, you went away, did go away, or i* 

lis s'en allaient, they went away, did go (may, or i 



124 



ELEMENTARY 



PRETERIT. 

J> m'en allai, I loent away or did go away. 

Ti t'en alias, thou went est away or didst go away. 

II s'en alia, he went away or did go away. 

Nous nous en allames, we went av:ay or did go away. 
Vous vous en allates, you went away or did go away. 
lis s'en allerent, they went away or did go away. 



Je m'en irai, 
Tu t'en iras, 
II s'en ira, 

Nous nous en irons, 
Vous vous en irez, 
lis s'en iront, 



Je m'en irais, 
Tu t'en irais, 
X I1 s'en irait, 

Nous nous en irions, 
Vous vous e.n iriez, 
lis s'en iraient, 



Va-t'en, 

Allons-nous-en, 

Allez-vous-en, 



FUTURE. 
/ shall or will go away, 
thou shall or wilt go aivay. 
he shall or will go away. 

we shall or will go away, 
you shall or will go away, 
they shall or will go away. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. 
I should, would, could, or might go away, 
thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst go auuy. 
he should, would, could or might go away. 

we should, would, could, or might go away, 
you should, would, could, or might go away, 
they should, would, could, or might go away. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

go (thou) aicay. 
let us go away, 
go (you) away. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

that I may go away. 
that thou mayst go away, 
that he may go away. 

Que nous nousenallions,///<7£ we may go away. 
Que vous vous en alliez, that you may go away. 
Qu'ils s'en aillent, hat they may go away. 



Que je m'en aille, 
Que tu t'en ailles, 
Qu'il s'en aille, 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 125 

IMPERFECT. 
Que je m'en allasse, that 1 might go away. 

Que tu t'en allasses, that thou might* _ 

Qu'il s'en allat, t/iatVie might go a 

Que nous nous en allassions, that we might go away. 

Que vous vous en allassiez, that you might go away. 

Qu'il s s'en all assent, that they might go away. 

COMPOUND TENSES OF 

S'EN ALLER. 

Comp. Inf. Pres., S'en etre alle, to have gone away. 

Comp. Pres. Part. S'en etant alle, having gone away. 

Comp. Indie. Pres., Je m'en suis alle, I have gone away. 

" Imp., Je m'en etais alle, I had »oue away. 

" Pret., Je m'en fus alle, I had gone away. 

" Fut., Je m'en serai alle, I shall have gone awat/. 

Comp. Cond. Pres., Je m'en serais alle, I should have gone away. 

" Suhj. Pres., Que je m'en sois alle, That I may have g< • 
" " Imp., Que je m'en fusse alle, That I might have gone away 



CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB 
S'ASSEOJR. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
present. S'asseoir, to sit down, 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. J'Arl. 

S'asseyant, sitting down. | Assis, sat i 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

Je m'assieds, I sit down, or am fl 

Tu t'assieds, ///"" sitU 

II s'assied, hi rite > 

Nous nous asseyons, til down, 

Vous vous asseyez, 

Us s'asseient, thnj sit <h>w,i. 

11* 



12G 



ELEMENTARY 



Je m'asseyais, 
Tu t'asseyais, 
II s'asseyait, 

Nous nous asseyions, 
Vous vous asseyiez, 
Us s'asseyaient, 

Je m'assis, 
Tu t'assis, 
II s'assit, 

Nous nous assimes, 
Vous vous assites, 
Us s'assirent, 

Je m'asseierai, 
Tu t'asseieras, 
II s'asseiera, 

Nous nous asseierons, 
Vous vous asseierez, 
Us s'asseieront, or 

Je m'assierai, 
&c, &c., 



Je m'asseierais, 
Tu t'asseierais, 
II s'asseierait, 

Nous nous asseierions, 
Vous vous asseieriez, 
Us s'asseieraient, or, 

Je m'assierais, 
&c, &c. 

Assieds-toi, 

Asseyons-nous, 

Asseyez-vous, 



IMPERFECT. 

I was sitting down. 
Thou wast " 
He was " 

We were " 
You were " 
They were " 

PREtERIT. 

I sat down. 
Thou sattest down* 
He sat down. 

We sat down. 
You sat down. 
They sat down. 

FUTURE. 

1 shall sit down* 
Thou wilt sit down. 
He will sit down. 

We shall sit down. 
You will sit down. 
They will sit down, or 

/ shall sit down. 
CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

/ should sit down. 
Thou shouldst sit down. 
He should sit down. 

We should sit down. 
You should sit (I men. 
They should sit down, or 

1 should sit down. 
$l t Set 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

sit down (thou.) 
let us sit down, 
sit down {you-) 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 



12? 



Que je m'asseie, 
Que tu t'asseies, 
Qu'il s'asseie, 

Que nous nous asseyions, 
Que vous vous asseyiez, 
Qu'ils s'asseient, 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

that I may sit down, 
that thou mayst sit down, 
that he may sit down. 

that ice may sit doicn. 
that you may sit down. 
that they may sit down. 
IMPERFECT. 



Que je m'assisse, 
Que tu t'assisses, 
Qu'il s'assit, 

Que nous nous assissions, 
Qne vous vous assissiez, 
Qu'ils s'assissent, 



that I might sit down. 
that thou might st sit down, 
that he might sit down. 



that we might sit down, 
that you might sit down, 
that they might sit down. 

N. B. The Compound Tenses of this verb are formed with the \\ix 
liary verb Eire. 



CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERB, 

Y AVOIR, THERE TO BE. 



Inf. Pres., Y avoir, 

There to be. 



Pres. Participle., Y ay ant, 
There hung. 



AFFIRMATIVELY. 

Ind. Pres., II y a, 



Thei*e is, 
There are. 

Ind. Imp., II y avait, 
There was, 
There were. 

Ind. Pret., II y eut, 

There was, 
There were. 

Ind. Fut., II y aura, 

There will be. 

Cond. Pres., II y aura it, 



Subj. Pres., 
Subj. Imp., 



INTERROGATIVELY. NBGA1 I VKI.V. 

y a-t-il 1 il n'y a pas. 

is there ? there is not. 

are there? there arc /mi. 

y avait-il ] il n'y avait pas. 

was t lie re ? then 

were there ? iher> 

y eut-ill il n'y eut 

was there ? then 

were there ? t/i<r> 

y aura-t-iH il n'y aura pas. 

icill there be ? there wd! n, 

y aurait-il 1 il n'y &C 

There icould be. would there U ? there would not be. 

Qu'il y ait, qu'il n'y ait pas. 

That there may be. thai thi > 

Qu'il y eut, qu'il n\ via pas. 
That there mis h 



128 



ELEMENTARY 



COMPOUND TENSES 
Comp. Infin. Pres., Y avoir eu, 



OP Y AVOIR. 

there to have been, 
there having been. 

there has or have been, 
there had been, 
there had been, 
there will have been, 
there would have been, 
that there may have been, 
that there might have been. 



CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERB 
FALLOIR, TO BE NECESSARY. 

(corresponding to the English verb must.) 



Pres. Part, 


Y ayant eu, 


Indie. Pres., 


11 y a eu, 


" Imp., 


11 y avait eu, 


" Pret., 


11 y eut eu, 


" Fut, 


11 y aura eu, 


Cond. Pres., 


11 y aurait eu, 


Subj. Pres., 


Qu'il y ait eu, 


" Imp. , 


Qu'il y eut eu, 



Inf. Present, 
Past Participle, 
Tnd. Pres., 

" Imp., 

" Pret., 

" Fut, 
Cond. Pres., 
Subj. Pres., 
u Imp., 



Falloir, 
Fallu, 
II faut, 
II fallait, 
II fallut, 
II faudra, 
II faudrait, 
Qu'il faille, 
Qu'il fallut, 



to be necessary. 

been necessary. 

it is necessary. 

it was necessary. 

it was necessary. 

it will be necessary 

it would be necessary. 

that it may be necessary. 

that it might be necessary. 



N. B. The Compound Tenses of this verb are conjugated with Avoir, in 
the third person singular only ; thus, 

Comp. Ind. Pres., II a fallu, it has been necessary. 

&c., &e., Sfc, <$c. 

Remark 1. — The impersonal verb II faut is followed by the sub- 
junctive mood, the present tense of the subjunctive being used 
after the present, II f ant, and the future, II faudra; and the pre- 
terit of the subjunctive after the other tenses of 11 faut. 



I must be, 
Thou must be, 
He must be, 
We must be, 
You must be, 
They must be, 



II faut que je sois. 
II faut que tu sois. 
II faut qu'il soit. 
11 faut que nous soyons. 
11 faut que vous soyez. 
II faut qu'ils soient. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 






so out ? 



1 must not 
Thou must not 
My brother must not 

Must we 
Must you 
Must the boys 

Must I not 

Must she not 

Must not my sisters 

It is necessary for me to go out. 

It was necessary for me to go out. 

It will be necessary for me to go. 

It would be necessary for me to go. 



go out. II ne faut pas 



, que je sorte. 
I que tu sortes. 
que mon firere sorte. 



C que nous sortiona ! 
Faut-il < que vous ^ortiez ? 

i que les garrons sortent 1 

I que je vienne? 
come? Ne faut-il pas ^ qu'elle vienne ? 

que messceurs viennent? 
II faut que je sorte. 
II fallait que je sorti 
II faudra que j'aille. 
I] faudrait que j'alla 



i: 



Remark 2. Must have may also be expressed thus : 



1 must have money, 

Thou must have books, 

My brother must have books, 

It will be necessary for me to have books, 
It was necessary for us to have money, 
It would be necessary for you to have friends, 
You will want friends, 



II me faut dc l'argent 

II te faut des In 

II faut des livres a moo 

fiere. 
II me faudra des livr 
Ilnousfallaitdel'arg 

II vous faudra it 

II vous faudra des ai 



CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERB 
PLEUVOIR, TO RAIN. 



Inf. Pres., 


Pleuvoir, 


to rain. 


Pres. Part., 


Pleuvant, 


raining. 


Past. Part., 


Plu, 


ram 


ltd. Pres., 


11 pleut, 


it ranis. 


" Imp., 


11 pleuvait, 


it was r<: 


" Pret., 


11 plut, 


it /' 


" FuL, 


11 pleuvra, 


il will rain. 


Cond. Pres., 


11 pleuvrait, 


. 


Subj. Pres., 


Qu'il pleuve, 


A it may ram. 


" Imp., 


Qu'il plut, 


that it n 



N. B. The Compound Tenses of this verb are formed W 
Comp. Indie. Pres., II a plu, It has rain 



130 ELEMENTARY 

THE FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF FRENCH 
VERBS. 

§ 1. It has been already remarked that French verbs have five 
'primitive tenses, from which all the other tenses are formed ; viz. 
the Present of the Infinitive, the Present Participle, the 
Past Participle, the Present of the Indicative, and the 
Preterit Definite of the Indicative mood. 

§ 2. From the Present of the Infinitive two tenses are 
formed ; 1. The Future Absolute, by the change of r, re, or oir 
into rai : as, porter, je porterai ; rendre, je rendrai ; recevoir, je 
recevrai. 

2. The Conditional Present, by the change of r, re, or oir into 
rais : as, porter, je porterais ; rendre, je rendrais ; recevoir, je 
recevrais. 

§ 3. From the Present Participle three tenses are formed ; 
1. The plural of the Indicative Present, by the change of ant into 
ons, ez, ent : as, portant, nous portons, vous portez, Us portent ; fi- 
nissant, nous finisso?is, vous finissez, Us finissent ; rendant, nous 
rendons, vous rendez, Us rendent. 

Except verbs of the third conjugation, which, in the third 
person plural of the Indicative Present, change evant into oivent : 
as, recevant, nous recevons* vous recevez, Us rec oivent. 

2. The Indicative Inperfect, by changing ant into ais : as, 
donnant, je donnais ; finissant, je Jinissais ; rendant, je rendais; 
recevant ; je recevais. 

3. The Subjunctive Present, by changing ant into e : as, don- 
nant, que je donne ; finissant, que je finisse ; rendant, que je 
rende. 

Except verbs of the third conjugation, which change evant into 
oive : as, recevant, que je recoive. 

§ 4. From the Past Participle are formed all the Compound 
tenses, by means of the auxiliary verbs Avoir and Etre. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 131 

§5. From the Present of the Indicative the Imperativ 
formed by omitting the pronouns tu, nous, vous ; and in verbs of 
the first conjugation, omitting the s of the second person singular : 
as, tit partes, parte ; nous portons, portons ; vous portt : . 
tit finis, finis ; nous finissons, finissons ; vous finisscz. 

§6. From the Preterit Definite the Subju 
is formed by changiug ai into asse in the first 
adding se in the second, third, and fourth conjugations 
donnai, que je donnasse ; je finis, que je finisse ; je n 
gusse ; je rendis, que je rendisse. 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

1. The compound tenses of verbs are formed by prefixing to 
their past participle the simple tenses either of the verb Avoir or 
the verb Etre. 

2. All active verbs are conjugated with the auxiliary verb 
Avoir, to have. 

3. All passive verbs are conjugated with the auxiliary ?erb 
Etre, to be. 

4. All reflected verbs are conjugated with the auxiliary \ 
Etre, to be. 

5. Some neuter verbs are always conjugated with Etre, to 
some are always conjugated with Avoir, to have; whil 

are conjugated sometimes with Avoir and Bometdmea with E 
according to their meaning. See the following list. 

A List of Neuter Verbs which are all 
Etre, to be. 

Aller, to go. Parvenir, 

Arriver, to arrive. Partir, 

Choir, to fall. Pnncnir, 

Deceder, to die. Redevenir, :,n - 

Devenir, to become. artir, 

Disconvenir, to disagree* I 

Echoir, to fill. Ret nl 

Eclore, to hatch. Rei 



132 ELEMENTARY 

Intervenir, to intervene. Survenir, to befall, 

Mourir, to die. Tomber, to fall. 

Naitre, to be born, Venir, to come. 

Remark. The neuter verbs which are conjugated with Etre 
only, express an idea either of motion or rest. 

EXAMPLES. 

COMPOUND TENSES 

OF THE ACTIVE VERB DONNER, . TO GIVE. 
Infin. Pres., Avoir donne, to have given. 

Pres. Part., Ay ant donne, having given. 

Indie. Pres., J 'ai donne, I have given. 

•' Imp., J'avais donne, i" had given. 

" Pret., J'eus donne, I had given. 

" Fut., J'aurai donne, I shall have given. 

Cond. Pres., J'aurais donne, I should have given. 

Subj. Pres., Que j'aie donne, that I may have given. 

" Imp., Que j'eusse donne, that I might have given, 

PASSIVE VOICE OF THE VERB AIMER, TO LOVE. 

Inf. Pres., Etre aime, to be loved. 

Pres. Part., Etant aime, being loved. 

Indie. Pres., Je suis aime, I am loved. 

" Imp., J'etais aime, I was loved. 

" Pret., Je fus aime, I teas loved. 

" Fut., Je serai aime, I shall be loved. 

Cond. Pres., Je serais aime, I should be loved. 

Imperative, Sois aime, be thou loved. 

" Soyons aimes, let us be loved. 

" Soyez aimes, be ye loved. 

Subj. Pres., Que je sois aime, that I may be loved. 

" Imp., Que je fusse aime, that I might be loved, 

COMPOUND "TENSES 
OF THE PASSIVE VOICE OF AIMER, TO LOVE. 

Compound of the Infinitive and Past Participle. 
Avoir ete aime, to have been loved. 

Compound of the Present and Past Participles. 
Ay ant etc aime, having ban loved. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. I33 

Co?np. Indie. Pra.,J'ai ete aime, I have been loved. 

" Imp., J'avais ete aime, I had been loved. 

" Pret.,y eus ete aime, I had been loved. 

*' JW., J'aurai ete aime, 7 5A0// ^are Z>mi fax </. 

" Corcd. Pres., J'aurais ete aime, I should have been I 

" £«#;. Pres., Que j'aie ete aime, that I may have I ■ 

" " 7m;?., Que j'eusse ete aime, that I might have been I 

COMPOUND TENSES 

OF THE NEUTER VERB TOMBER, TO FALL. 



Inf. Present, 




Etre tombe, 


to have fallen. 


Present Pan 


'iciple, 


Etant tombe, 


having fallen. 


Ind. Pres., 




Je suis tombe, 


I have fallen. 


u Imp., 




J'etais tombe, 


1 had fallen. 


" Pret., 




Je fus tombe, 


I had fallen. 


" Ful, 




Je serai tombe, 


I shall have fallen. 


Cond. Pres., 




Je serais tombe, 


I should have fallen. 


Subj. Pres., 




Que je sois tombe, 


that I may hax 


" Imp. 




Que je fusse tombe, 


that I might have fallen 



N. B. For an example of the Compound Tenses of aEFLEOTED 
Verbs, see Se Promener, page 123. 

VERBS CONJUGATED NEGATIVELY. 

1. Verbs are conjugated negatively in their simple tenses l>y 
placing ne before and pas after them. 

2. The compound tenses are conjugated negatively by pla- 
ne before the auxiliary and pas after it. 

3. Ne is written n > before a vowel or silent h. 



Infinitive Present. N ' aimer paS ' ° ? " \ not to ! 
Ne pas aimer, ) 

Comp. Inf. Pres., N'avoir pas aime, not to h we loved. 

Pres. Participle, N'aimant pas, not lovi ig. 

Comp. Pres. Part., N'ayant pas aime, 

Indicative Pres., Je n'aime pas, / do not love. 

' Comp. Indie. Pres., Je n'ai pas aim.', / I '' ,L 

hi ihc. Imp., Je n'aimais pas, Iitasnot ox 

L2 



134 ELEMENTARY 

Comp. Indie. Imp., Je n'avais pas aime, / had not loved 

Indie. PreL, Je n'aimai pas, I loved not. 

Comp. Indie. Pret., Je n'eus pas aime, / had not loved. 

Indicative Future, Je n'aimerai pas, I shall not love. 

Comp, Indie. Fut., Je n'aurai pas aime, I shall not have loved. 

Conditional Pres., Je n'aimerais pas, I should not love. 

" Past., Je n'aurais pas aime, ' / should not have loved. 

( N'aime pas, do (thou) not love. 

Imperative, < N'aimons pas, let us not love. 

[ N'aimez pas, love not (you) 

Subj. Pres., Que je n'aime pas, that I may not love, 

Comp. Subj. Pres., Que je n'aie pas aime, that I may not have loved. 

Subj. Imp., Que je n'aimasse pas, that 1 might not love. 

Comp. Subj. Imp., Que jen'eusse pas aime, that I might not have loved. 

VERBS CONJUGATED INTERROGATIVELY. 

1. A verb is conjugated interrogatively in its simple tenses by 
placing the pronoun, which is the subject or nominative of the 
verb, after the verb, and connecting them by a hyphen. 

2. The compound tenses are conjugated interrogatively by 
placing the pronoun, which is the subject of the verb, after the 
auxiliary. 

3. When the verb which is followed by the pronoun i7, elle, 
or ora, ends with a vowel, the letter £, preceded and followed by 
a hyphen, is placed between the verb and the pronoun. 

4. When, by placing the pronoun je after a verb in the first 
person singular, a harsh souud would be caused, the phrase Est- 
ce-que is prefixed to the verb : as, Do I sleep ? Est-ce que je 
dors ? Am I finishing ? Est-ce que je finis 1 

Example of a verb conjugated interrogatively. 

buLPrcs., ; Donnc-je, or }.*/**> 

( E-<t-ee que je doune. J 
Comp. Ind. Pres., Ai-je donne, liavc I given ? 

Ind. Imperf. t Donnais-je, was I giving? 

Comp. Ind. Imper., Avais-je domic, had I given? 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 135 

Indie. Pret., Donnai-je, did I g ive ? 

Comp. Ind. Pret., Eus-je donne, had I given ? 

Ind. Fut., Donnerai-je, shall Igwt ? 

Comp. Ind. Fut., Aurai-je donne, . shall I have given ? 

Conditional Pres., Donnerais-je, should I _ 

Comp. Cond. Pres., Aurais-je donne, should 1 n ? 

The indicative and conditional moods are tlie only moods n 
in asking questions. 



EXAMPLE OF A VERB 

CONJUGATED INTERROGATIVELY AND NEGATIVELY. 

t j r> ( Ne donne-ie pas, or ) , 7 . , 

Lid. Pres., \ . r i do 1 not gtvi I 

I Est-cequejenedonnepas, ) 

Comp. Ind. Pres., N'ai-je-pas donne, have I not given ? 

Ind. Imperfect, Ne donnais-je pas, was I no l 

Comp. Ind. Imp., N'avais-je pas donne, had 1 not given f 

Ind. Pret., Ne donnai-je pas r did 1 not git 

Comp. Ind. Pret, N'eus-je pas donne, had I not given ? 

Ind. Future, Ne donnerai-je pas, shall I n 

Comp. Ind. Fut., N'aurai-je pas donne, shall 1 not haVi given ? 

Conditional Pres., Ne donnerais-je pas, should I not gm ? 

Com. Cond. Pres., N'aurais-je pas donne, should I not fun 

COMPARISON 
BETWEEN THE TENSES OF ENGLISH VERBS AND THE Tl 
OF FRENCH VERBS. 

THE PRESENT TENSE OF THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 

§ 1. There are, in English, three fornu of the Present H 

Iwrite, I do write, lam writing. But these three forii 

pression, although they differ slightly in m 
lated into French by one form only, viz., ./' 
This is one of the difficulties of young Btu 
translate lam writing by je euis 
ecrire,&Q. ; but it must be remembered that there i> ho- 
of the present tense in French, fieri*. 



136 ELEMENTARY 

THE IMPERFECT TENSE. 

§ 2. — There are, in English^ three forms of the Imperfect Tense , 
I wrote, I did write, and I was writing. Only one of these, was 
writing, is always translated by the Imperfect Tense in French, 
fecrivais. When I wrote and I did write signify I used to write, 
I wrote habitually, they are likewise translated by the Imperfect, 
fecrivais. 

But when 1 wrote and I did write are used in connexion with 
time that has not expired, as this morning, to-day, this month, &c, 
they are translated by the Compound of the Present, Preterit In- 
definite, or Passe Indefini, (which are different names for the 
same tense,) fai ecrit. 

When I w rote and I did write are used in connexion with time 
entirely past, as yesterday, last week, &c, they are generally 
translated by the Passe Defini or Preterit, fecrivis. 

§ 3. — The Lnperfect Tense in French, (Imparfait,) is used, 

1st. To express an action which was taking place at the same 
time that another action took place ; as, 

J'ecrivais quand voire pere ar- I was writing when your father 



2nd. To express an action as done habitually in past time, or 
frequently repeated ; as, 

Quand j'etais h Washington^ When I was in Washington, I 

j'allais au Congres tons les jours. went {used to go) to Congress every 

day. 

3rd. In describing the qualities of persons or things, and the 
state, place, or disposition in which they were in time past, with- 
out any reference to the end of the state ; as, 

Howard etait un grand homme. Howard icas a great man. 

4th. After the conjunction si, if, where the conditional or sub 
lunctivc imperfect is used in English ; as, 

Si j'ktais a voire place. If I were in your place. 

Si j'etais malade. Li" 1 should be sick. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 



THE PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
(Translated by the English Imperfect.) 

§ 4. The Preterit Definite expresses an action which took 
place at a time which has entirely elapsed ; as, 

Je fassai hier chez vous. I called at your house yestei 

Je vis voire sceur et je lux parlai. I saw your sister and Sj 

C Preterit Indefinite, 
The Perfect Tense. | Passe Indefini, 

( Compound of the Present. 

§ 5. The Perfect Tense, in English, corresponds to the 1 h 
Passe Indefini, Preterit Indefinite, or Compound of the Pre* 
sent ; as, 

I have written to my sister. J'ai lcrit a ma sa . 

But the Preterit Indefinite is used very often in Fren 
cially in conversation and in writing letters, where the 
Imperfect would be employed ; as, 

When did you lose your purse 1 Qua nd 

I lost it this morning. bourse ? Ji V i 

What have you been doing these Qiiwf./ 

two weeks] I went to New-York, jours? Je sun alli 

and from there to Boston, where I et it 

spent several days, and enjoyed my- sievrs jow 

self very much. ami 

1. The Preterit Indefinite is used in speaking of an action | 

within a period that has not yet expired, BUCO a • this 

week; as, 

I icas at your house this morn- J'ai iti chez roi/s 

ing. 

2. The Preterit Indefinite also expresses an 

indeterminate time; as, 

Did you ever see my grand- 
father] pet 



138 ELEMENTARY 

3. The Preterit Indefinite must be used for tn: English Imper- 
fect and Perfect tenses, when they are accompanied by the words 
always, ever, never, and thus far. 



The Pluperfect Tense j J^ 8 ^ 35 -- 

( Passe Ani 



Parfait. 
Anterieur. 



§ 6. The English Pluperfect Tense is translated into French bv 
two tenses, the Compound of the Imperfect, or Plus-que-parfait, and 
the Compound of the Preterit, or Passe Anterieur. Both of these 
tenses correspond in meaning with the English tense, expressing 
an action that had taken place before another event which is also 
past. 

1. The Compound of the Imperfect is used when we wish to ex- 
press merely that one event occurred before another past event, 
without the latter's being a consequence of the former ; as, 

We had dined, when my father Nous avions dine, quand mon pere 

arrived. arriva. 

2. But when the idea conveyed by the second verb, is a conse- 
quence of, or depends upon, the event expressed by the first verb, 
the Compound of the Preterit is used ; as, 

As soon as we had dined, we Aussitot que nous eumes dine, 

went out. nous sortimes. 

The Compound of the Preterit is hardly ever used except aftei 
such conjunctions as aussitdt que, as soon as ; des que, as soon 
as 3 lorsque, when ; and the adverb quand, when. 

First Future. Futur Absolu, 

~ -n ( Futur Anterieur, or 

Second Future, j CoMPOUND 0F THE Futube. 

§7. (1.) The First Future tense of English verbs corresponds 
with the Futur Absolu of French Verbs ; as, 

I will go with you to-morrow. Pirai avcc vans domain. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 139 

(2.) The Second Future corresponds with the Futur antcricur 
or Compound of the future j as, 

I shall have finished my letter be- J'aurai fini ma Uttre avant votre 

fore your arrival. arnvee. 

But will in English does not always imply futurity ; sometimes 
it means willingness, and must be translated by the verb Vour 
loir ; as, 

Will you read now ? Vgulez-vows lire d present ? 

Potential Mood. 

§ 8. No mood in French corresponds with the Present tense 
of the English Potential Mood. 

1. May and can are translated by the present tense of the In- 
dicative Mood of the verb Pouvoir ; as, 

I may do it. Je peux le faire. 

He can walk. 11 pjjut marcher* 

2. May and can are also translated by the present of the Sub- 
junctive of Pouvoir, or the present of the Subjunctive of the ra- 
dical verb ; as, 

Bring it, that I may see it. Apportez-le, a fin m 

Voir, or, a/in qui ,' u \ 

3. Must is translated by some tense of the verb Fiilloir. 
has been explained on pages 128, 129. 

§ 9. The Imperfect Tense of the Potential Mood in English 
prefixes might, could, would, or should to the radical v 
These forms of expression are often translated into French by the 

Present of the Conditional Mood ; as, 

I should like to see your sister. .Taimeb u 

I would go with you, if I were J*n 

not sick. mal 

1. But when might implies power, ability, it ifl trani 



140 ELEMENrARY 

Conditional Present of the verb Pouvoir, and the radical verb is 
put in the Infinitive Mood ; as, 

He might do it, if he chose. II pourrait le faire, s'il le vou 

I ait. 

2. When could implies power, and is spoken emphatically, it is 

translated by a past tense of the verb Pouvoir, in speaking of past 

events, and by the Conditional Present of Pouvoir in speaking of 

the present or the future ; as, 

I could not go out yesterday. Je ne pus pas sortir hier. 

I could go out now, if I had my Je pourrais sortir a present, si 

hat. favais mon chapeau. 

3. When would implies willingness, it is translated by the In- 
dicative Imperfect of the verb Vouloir, and the radical verb is 
put in the Infinitive Mood ; as, 

If you would come with me, you Si vous vouliez venir avec moi, 

would see him. vous le verriez. 

4. Should, when it means ought, and conveys the idea of duty, 
is expressed by the Conditional Present of the verb Devoir ; as, 

These children should p*o to Ces enfants devraient aller a 

school. Vecole. 

5. When should follows if, it is included in the radical verb, 
which must be put in the Indicative Mood, imperfect tense ; as, 

If he should come, what should I SHI venait, que lui dirciis-je ? 

say to him] 

§ 10. The Perfect Tense of the Potential Mood in English 
prefixes may have, can have, or must have, to the past participle 
of the radical verb. 

1. May have and can have, followed by a past participle, are 
translated into French variously, as will be seen by the following 
examples. 

I may have done it, without H est possible que je aic fail > sans 

snowing it. le savoir ; or 

Je Vox ])( ut-itvcfail, sans h: savoir. 

How can you have made so many Comment avez-vous pu faire tani 

mistakes ] de j aides ? 



FRENCH EXERCI 141 

2. Must have, followed by a past participle, is variously 
translated, as the following examples will show : 

You must have seen him. 11 f aid que vous ?'• 

He must have broken the win- Bfaut que u 

dow ; no other person was near the la f entire ; U nij avait ; 
house. pcrsonne pris de la mcdson ; or, 

Cest lui seul qui a casse la 
f entire ; c$-c 

Your exercise is badly written; Votre theme est maleerit; U 

your pen must have been bad. que votre plume ail etc maw 

§ 11. The Pluperfect Tense of the Potential Mood, in E 
lish, prefixes might have, could have, would have, or should I 
to the past participle of the radical verb. These forms of 
pression are often translated into French by the Condition d i 
as, 

I would have given you some Je vous aurais donni d 

money, if you had asked me. si vous m'en aviez demandi. 

I should have gone out, if it had Je serais borti, s'il n 9 Q 

not rained. plu. 

1. But could have and might have, implying poivcr, abilitu, and 
followed by a past participle, are translated by the Conditi 
Past of Pouvoir, followed by the Infinitive ; as, 

You might have succeeded. Vous auri 

2. Should have, implying duty or ohligatlon, and folloi 
past participle, is translated by the Conditional Past of D< 

followed by the Infinitive ; as, 

You should have done it your- Vcu$ aurixi do / 

6elf. mime. 

Imperative Mood. Imi'kkatif. 

§ 12. — The Imperative Mood :n English baa only 

the 2nd person singular, and tlif 2nd | 
translated by the corresponding v 
of the French verb ; as, 

Love (thou.) .1 

Love (ye.) Ait 



142 ELEMENTARY 

1. But in French there is another person, the 1st. person plu- 
ral ; as, 

Aimons. Let us love. 

2. Let him, let her, and let them, followed by a verb, are 
translated by the third person singular and the third person plural 
of the Subjunctive Present j as, 

Let him give. QiCil donne. 

Let her give. Qu'elle donne. 

T . -i S Quails donnent, or, 

Let them give. { ^ , 77 , ' • 

& I y u Piles donnent. 

SlJBJONCTIF. 

§ 13. The French Subjunctive Mood (Subjonctif,) presents many 
difficulties to the young student. A few rules are here given to 
assist him in using it. 

The Subjunctive Mood expresses doubt. It is used, 
1st. After verbs denoting will, wish, desire, doubt, fear, won- 
der, and in general, the emotions of the mind ; as, 

I wish you to do your duty. Je veux que vous fassiez voire 

devoir. 

2nd. After a verb used interrogatively, when doubt is ex- 
;ressed ; as, 

Do you think he will come ? Croyez-vous qiCil vienne ? 

3rd. After verbs used impersonally, except such as it is sure, 
positive, certain, &c., as, 

It is possible he will come. H est possible qiCil vienxe. 

4th. After an adjective in the superlative degree, followed by 
a relative pronoun ; as, 

The best friend that I have. Le meillcur ami quefxiE. 

5th. After rien, aucun, pas un, j^crsonne, &c, followed by a 
relative pronoun ; as, 

We have nothing that suits her. Noils rfavons rien qui ltd cowi- 

ENNE. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 143 

6th. After quelque, quel que, qui que ce soit, quoi que ce soit, 
and the other Indefinite Pronouns followed by 
v. Chap, x.) 

Whatever may be your talents. Quels que soient r 

7th. After the conjunctions afin que, quoiquc, a mains que, 
avant que, lien que, de crainte que, &c : as, 

That you may have more time. Afin que vous aylz plus dt 

temps. 

8th. After a relative pronoun, or the adverb ou, when the : .- 
lowing verb expresses uncertainty ; as, 

I am looking for some one that Je chcr chequel 'quun qui me rv.\i >k 

may do me this service. ce service. 

Tenses of the Subjunctive Mood. 

§ 14. The Subjunctive Mood being always subordinate : 
that precedes it, its tenses are regulated by this for 

1. The Present of the Subjunctive, (also called the Future,) is 
used when the preceding verb is in the present or future of 
Indicative ; as, 

c I shall have time ! i que 

Do you thi?ik) I shall be ready ] Pensez-\ous .j que je foil pi • 

f I shall see her ! f que je 

C till I have time ; i qui 

He will wait \ till I am ready ; II attendra \ que 



11 I see her. f que 



2. The Imperfect of the Subjunctiv. 
that precedes it and requires it to be in the Bubjunotire, i- in 
imperfect or preterit of the Indicative, or in th( 
mood ; as, 

C till I had til ^ ' ; !,p8; 

Heuaswaiting < till Ishould be ready; II cH 

( till I should see hrr. f 

i till I had tune? t 

Wouldhe wait > tilllshoulil 

f tiil 



ill should see her 1 I 



144 



ELEMENTARY 



Additional Examples of the Subjunctive Mood. 



I order you 
I forbid you 
I want you 
I wish you 
I desire you 
I require you 

I am glad 
I am pleased 
I am delighted 
I am sorry 
I am surprised 
I see with pleasure 
I see with regret 



>to do it. 



that you have 
done it. 



J'ordonne 
Je defends 
Je veux 
Je souhaite 
Je desire 
J'exige 

Je suis bien aise 
Je suis content 
Je suis char me 
Je suis fdche 
Je suis surprh 
Je vois avecplaisir 
Je vois avec r egret 



que vous le 

FASSIEZ. 



que vous ^ayez 

FAIT. 



I fear you will do that. 
I fear you will not do that. 
I do not fear you will do that, 
Tell them to wait for me, 



Je crains que vous ne fassiez cela. 
Je crains que vous ne fassiez pas cela. 
Je ne crains pas que vous fassiez cela. 
Dites-leur quils rn'attendent. 



N. B. Although it is not intended in this little work to teach the 
Idioms of the French language, the following are so important even to 
young students that they are inserted. 

To BE, EXPRESSED BY AVOIR. 

1. The verb to be is expressed by the same mood and tense, 
number and person, of the verb Avoir ', when it is followed by the 
adjectives hungry, thirsty, &c. ; as, 



I am hungry. 
We are thirsty. 

' hungry, 
thirsty, 
cold, 
warm, 
sleepy, 
afraid, 
ashamed, 
right. 
wrong. 



J*Ai/at»*. 

Nous avons soif. 

- faun, 
soif. 
froid. 
chaud. 
Avoir < sommciL 
peur. 
hontc. 
raison. 
tort. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 



145 



2. The verb to be is also expressed bj Avoir in s] 

the age of persons ; as, 



How old are you } 
I am twenty. 



Quel agtAXhz-: 



To BE, EXPRESSED BY FAIRE. 

The verb to be, accompanied by a noun or an adjective denoting 
tbe state of tbe weather, is expressed in French by the Bame I 
of tbe verb faire, with il for its nominative ; as, 



How is the weather 1 ' 
[s the weather fine ! 
It will be cold to-morrow. 
It has been warm lately. 



Qvct temps fait U ? 
Fait \l beau temps? 
11 fkka j'roid demain. 
Il a fait chaud depyu 



To BE, EXPRESSED BY DEVOIR, 

The present tense and the imperfect tense of tl 
followed by another verb in the infinitive mood, 
the present tense and the imperfect tense of the verl) 
as, 



I am to pay four dollars. 
She is to come to-night. 
He was to bring it to-day. 



Jex)oi* payer quatn . 

Kllr Di IT Vi nr 

i 



To BE, TO DO, EXPRESSED BY Si PORTER. 

The verbs to be and to do, used in speaking of the /" 
expressed by the same tense and person of the I 

St Porter ; as, 



I low are you 1 \ 
How do you do? \ 



' 



13 



A ±0 ELEMENTARY 



VERBS. 

Infinitive Mood, Present Tense 
The Auxiliary Verbs. 

1 To have. 

2 To be. 

English of the model verbs. 

3 To give. 

4 To punish. 

5 To owe. 

6 To receive. 

7 To sell. 

English of the irregular verbs. 

8 To acquire. 9 to go. 10 to assail. 11 to beat 12 to 
boil. 13 to drink. 14 to conclude. 15 to pickle. 16 tv know, 
(to be acquainted ivith persons.) 17 to sew. 18 to run. 19 to 
fear. 20 to believe. 21 to grow. 22 to gather. 23 to say. 
24 to sleep. 25 to write. 26 to send. 27 to d© or make. 
28 to flee. 29 to hate. 30 to join. 31 to read. 32 to shine. 
33 to curse. 34 to lie, (to tell a falsehood.) 35 to put. 36 to 
grind. 37'to die. 38 to move. 39 to be born. 40 to offer. 
41 to open. 42 to graze. 43 to paint. 44 to please. 45 to 
be able. 46 to provide. 47 to take. 48 to foretell. 49 to 
prevail. 50 to foresee. 51 to reduce. 52 to resolve. 53 to 
laugh. 54 to break. 55 to know, (applied to inanimate objects, 
sciences, tyc.) 56 to serve. 57 to follow. 58 to milk. 59 to 
conquer. 60 to be worth. 61 to come. 62 to clothe. 63 to 
live. 64 to see. 65 to be willing. 6Q to eat. 67 to go 
forward. 68 to conceal. 69 to lead. 70 to call. 71 to throw. 
72 to try. 



FRENCH EXERCISE-. I ~ 

The following arrangement of the verbs was prepared by 
Charles Picot. As it was used for many years by him and other teach- 
ers with much success, it is, w 7 ith a few alterations, introduced into this 
work. 

CONJUGATION OF FRENCH VERBS. 

Infinitif Present. 

1 Avoir. 

2 Etre. 

Models of Regular Verbs. 

g Donner, a regular verb of the first conjugation 

4 Punir, " " second " 

5 Devoir, ) u u fcMrd M 

6 Recevoir, ) 

7 Vendre, " " fourth " 

frregular Verbs. 

8 Acquerir. 9 aller. 10 assaillir. 11 battre. 12 bouillir. 
13 boire. 14 conclure. 15 confire. 16 connaitre. 1 3 
18 courir. 19 craindre. 20 croire. 21 eroitre. 22 oueillir. 
23 dire. 24 dorniir. 25 ecrire. 26 envoyer. 27 faire. 28 fair. 
29 hair. 30 joindre. 31 lire. 32 luire. 33 maudire. 8 I w 
35 mettre. 36 moudre. 37 mourir. 38 mouvoir. 89 
40 offrir. 41 ouvrir. 42 paitre. 43 peindre. It plaire. 
45pouvoir. 46 pourvoir. 47 prendre. 48 pr< idire. 49 
valoir. 50prevoir. 51 r.'duiro. 52 r&oudre. 53 rire. 54 1 
pre 55savoir. 56 servir. 57 suivrc. 58 tr aire. 59 vail 
60 valoir. 61venir. 62 vetir. 63 vivre. 64 voir. 65 
loir. 

N B Before studying the followii the popil will c 

memory the remarks on the orthpgrap 

66 Manger. 67 avancer o^celer. 69mener. 

71 jeter. 72 essayer. 



148 ELEMENTARY 

Present Participle. 

1 Having, 2 being. 3 giving. 4 punishing. 5 owing 
6 receiving. 7 selling. 8 acquiring. 9 going. 10 assailing. 
11 beating. 12 boiling. 13 drinking. 14 concluding. 15 pick- 
ling. 16 knowing. 17 sewing. 18 running. 19 fearing. 20 be- 
lieving. 21 growing. 22 gathering. 23 saying. 24 sleep- 
ing. 25 writing. 26 sending. 27 doing or making. 28 fleeing. 
29 hating. 30 joining. 31 reading. 32 shining. 33 cursing. 
34 lying. 35 putting. 36 grinding. 37 dying. 38 movhg. 
39 being born. 40 offering. 41 opening. 42 grazing. 43 paiut- 
ing. 44 pleasing. 45 being able. 46 providing. 47 taking. 
48 foretelling. 49 prevailing. 50 foreseeing. 51 reducing. ' 
52 resolving. 53 laughing. 54 breaking. 55 knowing. 56 serv- 
ing. 57 following. 58 milking. 59 conquering. 60 beiug 
worth. 61 coming. 62 clothing. 63 living. 64 seeing. 65 being 
willing. 66 eating. 67 going forward. 68 concealing. 69 lead 
ing. 70 calling. 71 throwing. 72 trying. 



Past Participle. 

1 Had. 2 been. 3 given. 4 punished. 5 owed. 6 re- 
ceived. 7 sold. 8 acquired. 9 gone. 10 assailed. 11 beaten. 
12 boiled. 13 drunk. 14 concluded. 15 pickled. 16 known. 
17 sewed. 18 run. 19 feared. 20 believed. 21 grown. 
22 gathered. 23 said. 24 slept. 25 written. 26 sent. 27 done or 
made. 28 fled. 29 hated. 30 joined. 31 read. 32 shone. 
33 cursed. 34 lied. 35 put. 36 ground. 37 died. 38 moved- 

39 born. 40 offered. 41 opened. 42 43 painted. 44 pleased. 

45 been able. 46 provided. 47 taken. 48 foretold. 49 pre- 
vailed. 50 foreseen. 51 reduced. 52 resolved. 53 laughed. 
54 broken. 55 known. 56 served. 57 followed. 58 milked. 
59 conquered. 60 been worth. 61 come. 62 clothed. 63 lived. 
64 seen. 65 been willing. 66 eaten. 67 gone forward. OS con- 
cealed. 69 led. 70 called. ?1 thrown. 72 tried. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. [49 

Participe Present. 

1 Ayant. 2 etant. 3 dormant. 4 pnnissant 5 devant 

6 recevant. 7 vendant. 8 acquerant. 9 allant. 10 a&saillant 
11 battant. 12 bouillant. 13 buvaut. 14 conoluant 15 
tisaiit. 16 connaissant. 17 cousaut. 18 courant. 1. 
nant. 20 crojant. 21 croissant. 22 oueillant 23 die 
24 dormant. 25 ecrivant. 26 envoyant. 27 faisant 28 
ant. 29 haYssant. 30 joignant. 31 lisant. 32 luisant :;:] i 
dissant. 34 mentant. 35 mettant. 36 moulant. 37 mourant 
38 raouvant. 39 naissant. 40 offrant. 41 ouvrant. A'l \ 
sant. 43 peignant. 44plaisant. 45pouvant. 46 pourvn 
47 prenant. 48 predisant. 49 prevalant. 50prevoyant 5] 
duisant. 52 resolvant. 53 riant. 54 ronipant 55 saohant 
56 servant. 57 suivant. 58 trayant. 59 vainquant ant. 

61 venant. 62 vetant. 63 vivant. 64 voyant. 65 voulant 
66 mangeant 67 avancant. 68 celant 69 men&nt 70 appelant 
71 jetant. 72 essayant. 



ParticijJe Passe. 

lEu. 2 ete. 3 donne. 4 puni. 5 dii. 6 n«;:i. 7 
8 acquis. 9 alle. 10 assailli. 11 battu. 12 booilli. 18 bu. 
14 conclu. 15 confit. 16 connu. 17 cousu. 18 ooorn. 1 
20 cru. 21 cru. 22 cueilli. 23 dit. 24 dormi. 2 
26 envoye. 27 fait. 28 fui. 29 bai. 30 joint 81 In. 82 luL 
33 maudit. 34 menti. 30 mis. 36 moulu. 87 mort 88 ma, 
39 ne. 40 offert, 41 ouvert. 42 wanting. 18 peint I I 
45 pu. 46 pourvu. 47 pris. 48 pr6dit 49 prevalu, 
51 reduit. 52 resolu. 53 ri. 54 rompu. 55 an. 
57 suivi. 58 trait. 59 vaincu 60 valu. 61 vena, 
63 vecu. 64 vu. 65 voulu. 66 mang& 67 aw 
69 mene. 70 appelo. 71 jete\ 72 



13« 



150 



ELEMENTARY 



Indicative Mood, Present Tense. 



you, 
have 



they. 
have 
are 



7, thou, he, we, 

1 have hast has have 

2 am art is are are 
[give givest gives give give give 

3<j do give or dost give does give do give do give do give 

[am giving art giving is giving are giving are giving are giving. 

N. B. The three forms of the present tense given in full in the verb 
give are equally applicable to nearly all the following verbs, thus, — 1 
punish, do punish, or am punishing. 

4 punish punishest punishes punish punish punish 



5 owe 


owest 


owes 


owe 


owe 


owe 


6 receive 


receivest 


receives 


receive 


receive 


receive 


7 sell 


sellest 


sells 


sell 


sell 


sell 


8 acquire 


acquirest 


acquires 


acquire 


acquire 


acquire 


9 go 


goest 


goes 


go 


go 


go 


10 assail 


assailest 


assails 


assail 


assail 


assail 


11 beat 


beatest 


beats 


beat 


beat 


beat 


12 boil 


boilest 


boils 


boil 


boil 


boil 


13 drink 


drink est 


drinks 


drink 


drink 


drink 


14 conclude 


concludest 


> concludes conclude conclude 


conclude 


15 pickle 


picklest 


pickles 


pickle 


pickle 


pickle 


16 know 


knowest 


knows 


know 


know 


know 


17 sew 


sewest 


sews 


sew 


sew 


sew 


18 run 


runnest 


runs 


run 


run 


run 


19 fear 


fearest 


fears 


fear 


fear 


fear 


20 believe 


believest 


believes 


believe 


believe 


believe 


21 grow 


growest 


grows 


grow 


grow 


grow 


22 gather 


gatherest 


gathers 


gather 


gather 


gather 


23 say 


sayest 


says 


say 


say 


say 


24 sleep 


sleepest 


sleeps 


sleep 


sleep 


sleep 


25 write 


writest 


writes 


write 


write 


write 


26 send 


sendest 


sends 


send 


send 


send 


do, or 


doest 


does 


do 


do 


do 


\ make 


mukest 


makes 


make 


make 


make 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 

Indicatif Present. 



151 



N. B. Je is used before a verb beginning with a consonant, f before a 
?erb beginning with a vowel or silent Ju 



Je,j> 


tUj 


il, 


nons, 


vovs, 


i/s. 


1 ai 


as 


a 


avons 


avez 


ont 


2 suis 


es 


est 


sommes 


ties 


sont 



3 donne donnes donne donnons donnez donnent 

4 punis punis punit punissons punissez punissem 

5 dois dois doit devons devez doivent 

6 recois resois recoit recevons recevez rec,oivent 

7 vends vends vend vendons vendez vendent 



8 acquiers 


acquiers 


acauiertacquerons 


acquerei 


acquic 


9 vais 


vas 


va 


allons 


allez 


Yullt 


10 assaille 


assailles 


assaille 


assaillons 


illez 




11 bats 


bats 


bat 


battons 


battez 


batten! 


12 bous 


bous 


bout 


bouillons 


bouillei 


bouillent 


13 bois 


bois 


boit 


buvons 


buvei 


nt 


14 conclus 


conclus 


conclut concluons 


concluez 




15 confis 


confis 


confit 


confisons 


confi 




16 connais 


connais 


connait 


connuissons com 


' 


17 couds 


couds 


coud 


cousons 


cou- 




18 cours 


cours 


court 


courons 


cou r 




19 crains 


crains 


craint 


craignons 






20 crois 


crois 


croit 


croyons 


oroj '•/. 




21 crois 


crois 


croit 


oroist 






22 cueille 


cueilles 


cueille 


oueilloDS 


illei 




23 dis 


dis 


dit 


disonfi 


(lit' s 


nt 


24 dors 


dors 


dort 


dormona 


dormei 


don 


25 e'er is 


<'cris 


<crit 


(Crivons 


.Vi ■: 




26 envoie 


envoies 


envoie envoyona 


c\\\ 




27 fais 


fais 


fait 


fais 


fat 


font 



152 




ELEMENTARY 






I, 


thou, 


he, 


we, 


you 9 


they. 


28 flee 


fleest 


flees 


flee 


flee 


flee 


29 hate 


hatest 


hates 


hate 


hate 


hate 


30 join 


joinest 


joins 


join 


join 


join 


31 read 


readest 


reads 


read 


read 


read 


32 shine 


shinest 


shines 


shine 


shine 


shine 


33 curse 


cursest 


curses 


curse 


curse 


curse 


34 lie 


liest 


lies 


lie 


lie 


lie 


35 put 


puttest 


puts 


put 


put 


put 


36 grind 


grindest 


grinds 


grind 


grind 


grind 


37 die 


diest 


dies 


die 


die 


die 


38 move 


movest 


moves 


move 


move 


move 


39 am born 


art born 


is born 


are born 


are born 


are born 


40 offer 


offerest 


offers 


offer 


offer 


offer 


41 open 


openest 


opens 


open 


open 


open 


42 graze 


grazest 


grazes 


graze 


graze 


graze 


43 paint 


paintest 


paints 


paint 


paint 


paint 


44 please 


pleasest 


pleases 


please 


please 


please 


am able or art able or is able or 

A £ 


are able 


are able 


are able 


45 

can 


canst 


can 


can 


can 


can 


46 provide 


providest 


provides 


provide 


provide 


provide 


47 take 


takest 


takes 


take 


take 


take 


48 foretell 


foretellest foretells 


foretell 


foretell 


foretell 


49 prevail 


prevailest prevails 


prevail 


prevail 


prevail 


50 foresee 


foreseest 


foresees 


foresee 


foresee 


foresee 


51 reduce 


reducest 


reduces 


reduce 


reduce 


reduce 


52 resolve 


resolvest 


resolves 


resolve 


resolve 


resolve 


53 laugh 


laughest 


laughs 


laugh 


laugh 


laugh 


54 break 


breakest 


breaks 


break 


break 


break 


55 know 


knowest 


knows 


know 


know 


know 


56 serve 


servest 


serves 


serve 


serve 


serve 


57 follow 


followest 


follows 


follow 


follow 


follow 


58 milk 


milkest 


milks 


milk 


milk 


milk 


69 conquer 


conquerest conquers 


conquer 


conquer 


con qu ci- 


60 am worth 


I art worth 


is worth 


are worth 


are worth 


are worth 


61 come 


coiuest 


comes 


come 


come 


come 


62 clothe 


clothest 


clothes 


clothe 


clothe 


ulothe 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 






JeJ> 


ti/y 


zZ, 


nous, 


BOMS, 




28 fuis 


fuis 


fuit 


fuyons 


fuvez 




29 hais 


hais 


hait 


haissons 


haissez 




30 joins 


joins 


joint 


joignons 


joignez 




31 lis 


lis 


lit 


lisons 


Lisez 




32 luis 


luis 


luit 


luisons 


luisez 


luiseni 


33 maudis 


maudis 


maudit 


maudissons 


mau<: 


maud 


34 mens 


mens 


ment 


mentons 


mentez 


mentent 


35 mets 


mets 


met 


mettons 


mettez 


mettent 


36 monds 


mouds 


moud 


moulons 


moulez 


Dion] 


37 meurs 


meurs 


meurt 


mourons 


mourez 


mem 


38 meus 


meus 


meut 


mouvons 


mouvez 


meuvent 


39 nais 


nais 


nait 


naissons 


nais 




40 offre 


offres 


offre 


offrons 


offrez 


ottti 


41 ouvre 


ouvres 


ouvre 


ouvrons 


ouvrez 




42 pais 


pais 


pait 


paissons 


paiss 


paissent 


43 peins 


peins 


peint 


peignons 


:iez 




44 plais 


plais 


plait 


plaisons 


plaiscz 


plais 


peux or 

45 

puis 


peux 


peut 


poiiv< • - 


pouvez 


peuvent 












46 pourvois 


pourvois 


pourvoit 


pourvoyons pourvovez 


pour'. t 


47 prends 


prends 


prend 


prenons 


prenez 




48 predis 


predis 


predit 


predisons 






49 prevaux 


prevaux 


prevaut prevalons 


prevalez 


■ 


50 prevois 


prevois 


prevoit 


pivvoyons pr 


pr '\ 


51 reduis 


reduis 


reduit 


rgduisona 


reai 




52 resous 


resous 


resout 


resolvons 


Jyez 




53 ris 


ris 


rit 


rions 


riez 




54 romps 


romps 


rompt 


rompons 


roii!]"/. 


romj 


55r sais 


sais 


sait 


savons 


s:i\ 




56 sers 


sers 


sert 


servon-i 






57 suis 


suis 


suit 


BUlVODfl 






58 traia 


trais 


trait 


tr;i; 






59 vain ci' 


vaincs 


. vainc 


vainquoi a vainq 


60 vaux 


vaux 


vaut 


val 






61 viens 


viens 


vicnt 


VrllollS 




oent 


62 vets 


vets 


vOt 


vet on B 







154 



ELEMENTARY 



7, hou, 

63 live livest 

64 see seest 

65 am willing or will, 

66 eat eatest 



he, we, you, they. 

lives live live live 

sees see see see 

art willing or wilt, is willing or will, &o, 



eats 



eat 



eat 



67 go forward, goest forward, goes forward, &c 

68 conceal concealest conceals 

69 lead leadest leads 

70 call callest calls 

71 throw throwest throws 

72 try triest tries 



eat 



concea 


I conceal 


conceal 


lead 


lead 


lead 


call 


call 


call 


throw 


throw 


throw 


try 


try 


try 



Indicative Mood, Imperfect Tense. 

1 had hadst had had had had 

2 was wast was were were were 

3 gave, was giving, or used to give. 4 punished, was punishing, 
or used to punish. 

The three forms of the imperfect tense here exhibited are applicable 
to the verbs that follow. 

5 owed. 6 received. 7 sold. 8 acquired. 9 went. 10 as- 
sailed. 11 beat. 12 boiled. 13 drank. 14 concluded. 15 pickled. 
16 knew. 17 sewed. 18 ran. 19 feared. 20 believed. 21 grew. 
22 gathered. 23 said. 24 slept. 25 wrote. 26 sent. 27 did 
or made. 28 fled- 29 hated. 30 joined. 31 read. 32 shone. 
33 cursed. 34 lied. 35 put. 36 ground. 37 died. 38 moved. 
39 was born. 40 offered. 41 opened. 42 grazed. 43 paint- 
ed. 44 pleased. 45 was able or could. 46 provided. 
47 took. 48 foretold. 49 prevailed. 50 foresaw. 51 reduced. 
52 resolved. 53 laughed. 54 broke. 55 knew. 56 served. 
57 followed. 58 milked. 59 conquered. 60 was worth. 
61 came. 62 clothed or clad. 63 lived. 64 saw. 65 was willing. 
66 cat. 67 w r ent forward. 68 concealed. 69 led. 70 called 
71 threw. 72 tried. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 



155 



I*,f 


tu 9 


U, 


TICKS. 


roas, 




63 vis . 


vis 


vit 


vivons 


vivez 


vivent 


64 vois 


vois 


voit 


voyons 






65 veux 


veux 


veut 


voulons 


VOlllez 


veul 


66 mange 


manges 


mange 


mangeons 


man{ 


mangent 


67 avance 


avances 


avance 


avancons 


avancez 


aval 


68 cele 


celes 


cele 


celons 


celei 


celent 


69 mene 


menes 


mene 


menons 


menez 


Hi. Dl lit 


70 appelle 


appelles 


appelle 


appelons 


appelez 


aj pellent 


71 jctte 


jettes 


jette 


jetons 


jetez 


j c 1 1 


72 essaie 


essaies 


essaie 


essayons 


essayez 


lent 



N. B. The pupil will observe that the second person, sir: 
ends in s, except peux, veux, vaux ; the first person, plural, in 
cept sommes ; the second person, plural, in ez, except 

Imparfait de V Indicatif. 
The terminations of this tense are ais, ais, ait, ions, 
aient. 

1 Avais avais avait avions aviez avairiit. 

2 etais etais etait ctions ttiez 

N. B. The first person singular of the following we 
The other persons are formed from it by dropping the tennm 
and adding the other terminations, as given above. 

3 Donnais. 4 punissais. 5 devais. 6 recevais. 7 
8 acquerais. 9 allais. 10 assaillais. 11 battais. L2 1 
13 buvais. 14 concluais. 15 confisais. L6 001 
17 cousais. 18 courais. 19 craignaift. 20 eroyais. 21 
sais. 22 cueillais. 23 disais. 24 dormais. 25 

26 envoyais. 27 faisais. 28 fuyais. 29 haissau. BO 

31 lisais. 32 luisais. 33 maudissais. 34 mentais* 

36 moulais. 37 mourais. 38 mouvais. 89 Dai 

41 ouvrais. 42 paissais. 43 peignais. A 1 plai 

46 pourvoyais. 47 prenais. 48 pr&iisais. 19 | 

voyais. 51 reduisais. 52 resolvaia. 

55 savais. 56 servais. 57 Buivais. 

60valais. 61 venais. 62 \vtais. 63 vivais. 64 w 

lais. 66 mangeairt. 67 avan$ais. 68 lab. I I iaia. 70 ft] 

lais. 71 jetais. 72 essayaifl. 



156 ELEMENTARY 

Judical" ve Moody 1'reterite or Past lense. 

N. B The pupil must be careful not to confound this tense with the 
one called Perfect in most English Grammars. The latter corresponds 
to the Compound of the Present, the Parfait Indefini, or Passe Indefini 
of French verbs ; as, I have loved, Tai aime. 



1 Had 


hadst 


had 


had 


had 


had. 


2 was 


wast 


was 


were 


were 


were. 



3 gave or did give, gavest or didst give, etc. 4 punished or 
did punish, punishedst or didst punish, etc. 5 owed or did owe, 
etc. 6 received or did receive, etc. 7 sold or did sell, soldest 
or didst sell, etc. 8 acquired. 9 went. 10 assailed. 11 beat. 
12 boiled. 13 drank. 14 concluded. 15 pickled. 16 knew. 
17 sewed. 18 ran. 19 feared. 20 believed. 21 grew. 
22 gathered. 23 said. 24 slept. 25 wrote. ,26 sent. 27 did 

or made. 28 fled. 29 hated. 30 joined. 31 read. 32 

33 cursed. 34 lied. 35 put. 36 ground. 37 died. 38 moved. 

39 was born. 40 offered. 41 opened. 42 43 painted. 

44 pleased. 45 was able or could. 46 provided. 47 took. 
48 foretold. 49 prevailed. 50 foresaw. 51 reduced. 52 re- 
solved. 53 laughed. 54 broke. 55 knew. 56 served. 

57 followed. 58 59 conquered. 60 was worth. 61 came, 

earnest, came, came, came, came, or did come, etc. 62 clothed 
or clad. 63 lived. 64 saw. 65 was willing or would. 66 eat. 
67 went forward. .68 concealed. 69 led. 70 called. 71 threw. 
72 tried. 

Indicative Mood, Future Tense. 

1 (1) shall have, (thou) wilt have, (he) will have, (we) shall 
have, (you) will have, (they) will have. 2 shall be. 3 shall 
give. 4 shall punish. 5 shall owe. 6 shall receive. 7 shall 
sell. 8 shall acquire. 9 shall go. 10 shall assail. 11 shall 
beat. 12 shall boil. 13 shall drink. 14 shall conclude. 
15 shall pickle. 16 shall know. 17 shall sew. 18 shall run. 
19 shall fear. 20 shall believe. 21 shall grow. 22 shall 
gather. 23 shall say. 24 shall sleep. 25 shall write. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 



151 



Preterit Defi-ni, ou Passt D fmi. 
Terminations in the first conjugation, at, as, 

hrnt. In the other conjugations, 5, 5, t, fin 
J Eus 

2 fus 

3 donnai 

4 punis 

5 dus 

6 re (jus 

7 vendis 



eus eut eumes 

fus fut fumes 

donnas donna donnfunes 

pums punit punimes 

dus dut d umes 

re^us recut recumes 

vendis vendit vendimes- 





car 


fates 


far 


donna t es 


donn 


punites 


panirent 


dates 


darent 


refutes 


recurent 


vendites 


vendirent 



N. B. The first person singular of the following verbs i 
this the other persons are formed by dropping the termination of the first 
person and adding the other terminations, as given above. 

This remark applies to the other tenses also. 

8 Acquis. 9 allai. 10 assaillis. 11 battis. 12 bouillis. 
13 bus. 14 conclus. 15 confis. 16 connus. 17 OOU818. 18 OOO 
19craignis. 20 crus. 21 crCis. 22 cueillis. 23 dis. 24 dor- 
mis. 25 ecrivis. 26 envoyai. 27 fis. 28 fuis. 29 I 
30 joignis. 31 lus. 32 wanting. 33 maudis. 3 1 
35 mis. 36 moulus. 37 mourus. 38 mus. 39 naqu 
41 ouvris. 42 wanting. 43 peignis. 44 plus. 45 pus. 46] 
47 pris. 48 predis. 49 prevalus. 50 previa. .".1 
52 resolus 53 ris. 54 rompis. 55 sus. 
vis. 58 wanting. 59 vainquis. 60 Tains. 61 (m 
ending in enir,) vins, vins, vint, lAnmes, rim 
63 vecus. 64 vis. 65 voulus. 66 mangeai 67 aval 
68 celai. 69 nienai. 70 appelai. 71 jetai. 72 yai 

Futur Absolu. 

Terminations, rai, ras, fa 9 rons-, n :, rout. 

1 Aurai 9 auras, aura, auron&y avn z, auroni. 
nerai. 4 punirai. 5 devrai. 6 reC6VTaL 7 
querrai. 9 irai. 10 assaillirai. 11 battrai, 12 I 
13 boirai. 14 conclurai. 15 confirai. 16 001 
drai. 18 courrai. 19 oraindrai 'J" eroirai. 21 
22 cueiUerai. 23 dirai. 24 dormirai. 25 ScririL 

11 



158 ELEMENT Alir 

26 shall send 27 shall do oi make. 28 shall flee. 29 shall 
hate. 30 shall join. 31 shall read. 32 shall shine. 33 shall 
curse. 34 shall lie. 35 shall put. 36 shall grind. 37 shall 
die. 38 shall move. 39 shall be born. 40 shall offer. 41 shall 
open. 42 shall graze. 43 shall paint. 44 shall please. 45 shall 
be able. 46 shall provide. 47 shall take. 48 shall foretell. 
49 shall prevail. 50 shall foresee. 51 shall reduce. 52 shall 
resolve. 53 shall laugh. 54 shall break. 55 shall know. 56 shall 
serve. 57 shall follow. 58 shall milk. 59 shall conquer. 60 shall 
be worth. 61 shall come. 62 shall clothe. 63 shall live. 64 shall 
see. 65 shall be willing. ^6 shall eat. 67 shall go forward. 
68 shall conceal. 69 shall lead. 70 shall call. 71 shall throw. 
72 shall try. 

Conditional JMood i Present Tense. 
1 (I) would have, or (I) should have, or (I) could have, or (I) 
might have, (thou) wouldst have, &c. 2 would be. 3 would 
give. 4 would punish. 5 would owe. 6 would receive. 7 would 
sell. 8 would acquire. 9 would go. 10 would assail. 11 would 
beat. 12 would boil. 13 would drink. 14 would conclude. 
15 would pickle. 16 would know. 17 would sew. 18 would 
..run. 19 would fear. 20 would believe. 21 would grow. 22 would 
gather. 23 would say. 24 would sleep. 25 would write. 
26 would send. 27 would do or make. 28 would flee. 29 would 
hate. 30 would join. 31 would read. 32 would shine. 33 would 
curse. 34 would lie. 35 would put. 36 would grind. 37 would 
die. 38 would move. 39 would be born. 40 would offer 
41 would open. 42 would graze. 43 would paint. 44 would 
please. 45 would be able. 46 would provide. 47 would take. 
48 would foretell. 49 would prevail. 50 would foresee. 
51 would reduce. 52 would resolve. 53 would laugh. 54 would 
break. 55 would know. 56 would serve. 57 would follow. 
58 would milk. 59 would conquer. 60 would be worth. 61 would 
come. 62 would clothe. 63 would live. 64 would see. 65 would be 
willing. 66 would eat. 67 would go forward. 68 would con- 
ceal. 69 would lead. 70 would call. 71 would throw. 
72 would try. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 1 » 

26 enverrai. 27 feral. 28 fuirai. 29 halrai. 30 

31 lirai. 32 luirai. 33 maudirai. 34 mentiraL traL 

36 moudrai. 37 mourrai. 38 mouvrai. 39 naitrai. rirai. 

41 ouvrirai. 42 paitrai. 43 peindrai. 44plairai. IS 

46 pourvoirai. 47 prendrai. 48 predirai. 49 pn 

50 prevoirai. 51 r'duirai. 52 resoudrai. 53 riraL 

prai. 55 saurai. 56 servirai. 57 suivrai. 58 trairai. 59 vai: 

60 vaudrai. 61 viendrai. 62 vctirai. 63 vivrai. 

65 voudrai. 66 mangerai. 67 avancerai. 68 oelerai. 
nerai. 70 appellerai. 71 jetterai. 72 cssaierai. 

The future tenses in italics are not formed regularly. 
Conditionnel Present. 

Terminations, rais, rais, rait, rions, r : < c, raient. 

1 Aurais, aurais, aurait, aurioris, auriez, auraient. 
3 donnerais. 4 punirais. 5 devrais. 6 recevrais. 7 
8 i -querrais. 9 irais. 10 assaillirais. 11 battrais, L2 -uil- 
lirais. 13 boirais. 14 conolurais. 15 contirais. L6 
trais. 17 coudrais. 18 courrais. 10 craindrais. 20 
21 croitrais. 22 cueillerais. 23 dirais. 24 dormirais, 
26 enverrais. 27 ferais. 28 fuirais. 29 hairais. 
31 lirais. 32 luirais. 33 maudirais. 34 men tin 
trais. 36 moudrais. 37 mourrais. 38 mom i 
40 ofFrirais. 41 ouvrirais. 42 paltrais. 43 peindraifl. II 
rais. 45 pciirrais. 46 pourvoirai-. 47 pren drais. ' 
rais. 49 prevaudrais. 50 pre>oirais. 51 rdduirai . 
drais. 53 rirais. 54 romprais. 55 
57 suivrais. 58 trairais. 59vaincrais. 60 vandrais. 61 
drais. 62 vetirais. 63 vivrais. 64 " 

66 mangerais. 67 avaneerai-. 

70 appellerais. 71 jetterais. 72 essaieraifl. 

The tenses in italics are Dot formed regularly. 



160 



elemen: ary 



Imperative Mood, Present Tense. 

The imperative mood has only three persons, viz., the second person 
singular, and the first and second persons plural. 

1 Have (thou) or do thou have, let us have, have ye or you, or 
do have. 2 be thou, &c. 3 give thou, &c. 4 punish thou, &c. 5 owe 
thou, &c. 6 receive thou, &c. 7 sell thou, &c. 8 acquire thou, &c. 
9 go thou, &c. 10 assail thou, &c. 11 beat thou, &c. 12 boil 
thou, &c. 13 drink thou, &c. 14 conclude thou, &c. 15 pickle 
thou, &c. 16 know, thou, &c. 17 sew thou, &c. 18 run thou, 
&c. 19 fear thou, &c. 20 believe thou, &c. 

21 grow thou, &c. 22 gather thou, &c. 

23 say thou, &c. 24 sleep thou, &c. 

25 write thou, &c. 26 send thou, &c. 

27 do thou or make thou, &c. 28 flee thou, &c. 



30 join thou, &c. 
32 shine thou, &c. 
34 lie thou, &c. 
36 grind thou, &c. 
38 move thou, &c. 
40 offer thou, &c. 
42 graze thou, &c. 
44 please thou, &c. 
46 provide thou, &c. 
48 foretell thou, &c. 
50 foresee thou, &c. 
52 resolve thou, &c. 
54 break thou, &c. 
56 serve thou, A:c. 
58 milk thou, &c. 
60 be thou worth, &c. 
62 clotl e thou, &c. 
64 see thou, &c. 



29 hate thou, &c. 
31 read thou, &c. 
33 curse thou, &c. 
35 put thou, &c. 
37 die thou, &c. 
89 be thou born, &c. 
41 open thou, &c. 
43 paint thou, &c. 

45 

47 take thou, &c. 
49 prevail thou, &c 
51 reduce thou, &c. 
53 laugh thou, &c. 
55 know thou, &c. 
57 follow thou, &c. 
59 conquer thou, &c. 
61 come thou, &c. 
63 live thou,.&c. 

65 be thou willing, let us be willing, be ye willing, or be so good 

66 eat thou, &c. 67 go thou forward, &c. 
68 conceal thou, &c 69 lead thou, &c. 

70 call thou, &c. 71 throw thou, &c. 

72 try thou, &c. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. If,] 

Irnperatif PrCsent. 

1 [2d. per. sing.) Aie, (1st. per. plur.) ayons, (2d 
ayez. 2 sois, soyons, soyez. 3 donne, donnons, donn< z. 4] 
punissons, punissez. 5 dois, devons, devez. G 
recevez. 7 vends, vendons, vendez. 8 acqui 
acquerez. 9 va, allons, allez. 10 assaille, assaill illez. 

11 bats, battons, battez. 12 bous, bouillons, bouil. 
buvons, buvez. 14 conclus, concluons, concluez. 1 E 
confisons, confisez. 16 connais, connaissons, com 
cousons, cousez. 18 cours, courons, courez. 19 
nons, craignez. 20 crois, croyons, croyez. 21 cr( 
croissez. 22 cueille, cueillons, cueillez. 23 dis, 
24 dors, dormons, dormoz. 25 ecris, eerivons, gcrivez. 
voie, envoyons, envoyez. 27 fais, faisons, faites. 
ons, fuyez. 29 hais, haissons, haissez. 30 joi 
joignez. 31 lis, lisons, lisez. 32 luis, luisons, lui>- 
dis, maudissons, maudissez. 34 mens, mentons, men! 
mettons, mettez. 36 mouds, moulons, monies. o7 incurs, mou- 
rons, mourez. 38 meus, mouvons, mouvez. 39 D 
naissez. 40 offre, offrons, ofFrez. 41 ouvre, om 
42 pais, paissons, paissez. 43 peins, peignoi 
plaisons, plaisez. 45 wanting. 46 pourvois, poun 
voyez. 47 prends, prenons, prenez. 48 predis, j r 
disez. 49 pr&vaux, prevalons, privates. 50 pi 
prevoyez. 51 reduis, reMuisons, r£duisez. 52 r<» 
resolvez. 53 ris, rions, riez. 54 romps, romj 
55 sache, sachons, sacbez. 56 sers, a 
suivons, suivez. 58 trais, trayons, trayez. 59 rainos, 
vainquez. 60 vaux, valous, valez. 61 1 
62 vets, vetons, vetez. 63 vis, vivons, \'w /.. 6 1 
voyez. 65 veux, voulons, voulez, or v • • 

geons, mangez. 67 avance, avangons, aval 
eelez. 69 mene, rocnons, menez. 
71 jette, jetons, jetez. 72 



162 ELEMENTARY 

Subjunctive Mood, Present Tense. 
1 That I may have, that thou mayst have, that he may have f 
that we may have, that you may have, that they may *ave. 

2 That I may be, &c. 

3 That I may give, &c. 

4 That T may punish, &c. 

5 That I may owe, &c. 

6 That I may receive, &c. 

7 That I may sell, &c. 

8 That I may acquire, &c 

9 That I may go, &c. 

10 That I may assail, &c. 

11 That I may beat, &c. 

12 That I may boil, &c. 

13 That I may drink, &c. 

14 That I may conclude, &c. 

15 That I may pickle, &c. 

16 That I may know, &c. 

17 That I may sew, &c. 

18 That I may run, &c. 

19 That I may fear, &c. 

20 That I may believe, &c. 

21 That I may grow, &c. 

22 That I may gather, &c. 

23 That I may say, &c. 

24 That I may sleep, &c. 

25 That I may write, &c. 

26 That I may send, &c r 

27 That I may do or make, &0. 

28 That I may flee, &o. 

29 That I may hate, &c. 

30 That I may join, &o. 

31 That I may read, fkc. 

32 That I may shine, &c. 

33 That I may curse, &c. 
3 1 That I may lie &c, 
35 That 1 may put, &,e. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 103 

Subjonctif Present on Futur. 
Terminations, e, es, e, ions, iez, ent, except in Avoir and E 

1 Que j' aie, que tu aies, qu 5 il ait, que nous aye: <>ua 

ayez, qu 5 ils aient. 

N. B. In the following verbs the conjunction que, and the pronou- 
or j\ tu, iU nous, vous, tls, are omitted for the sake of brevity 
writing or reciting the verbs, the pupil must supply them as in the 
ceding model, Que f aie, dfc, 

2 Sois, sois, soit, soyons, soyez, soient. 3 donne, don; 
donne, donnions, donniez, donnent. 4 punisse, punisses, puni 
punissions, punissiez, punissent. 5 doive, doives, d 
deviez, doivent. 6 receive, receives, recoive, recevi 
recoivent. 7 vende, vendes, vende, vendions, vendiez, 

8 aequiere, acquieres, acquiere, acquerions, acqu& 

rent. 9 aille, ailles, aille, allions, allies, allien t. 10 assaille, 

assailles, assaille, assaillions, assailliez, assaillent. 11 I 

battes, batte, battions, battiez, battent. 12 bouille, 

bouille, bouillions, bouilliez, bouillent. 13 boive, 1 

buvions, buviez, boivent. 14 conclue, conclu* 

cluions, concluiez, concluent. 15 confise, confises, con! 

fisions, confisiez, confisent. 16 connaisse, com 

connaissions, connaissiez, connaissent. 17 OOUfi 

cousions, cousiez, cousent. 18 coure, coures, eoure, 

couriez, courent. 19 craigne, craignes, craigne, eraij 

niez, craignent. 20 croie, croies, croie, croyionfi 

21 croisse, croisses, croisse, croissions. i 

eille, cueilles, cueille, cueillions, cueilliez, oueillent, 2 

dise, disions, disiez, disent. 24 dormc, dormea, dornie, dormi 

dormiez, dorment. 25 ecrive, ('crives, ecri 

ecrivent. 26 envoie, envoies, envoie, env< 

ent. 27 fasse, fasses, fasse, 1 

fuies, fuie, fuyions, fuyiez, Fuient, 2 

haissions, hai'ssiez, lia'issent. 31 1 j 

joigniez, joignent. 31 Use, lises, Li 

32 luise, luises, luise, lnisions, Luifli 

inaudisses, maudisse, maudissiona, man 

34 mente, nientes, mente, men! 

uiettes, niette, mettions, metti ent 



164 ELEMENTARY 

36 That ] may grind, &c. 

37 That I may die, &c. 

38 That I may move, &c. 

39 That I may be born, &o. 

40 That I may offer, &c. 

41 That I may open, &c. 

42 That I may graze, &c. 
^ 43 That I may paint, &c. 

44 That I may please, &c. 

45 That I may be able, &c. 

46 That I may provide, &c. 

47 That I may take, &c. 

48 That I may foretell, &c. 

49 That I may prevail, &c. 

50 That I may foresee, &c. 

51 That I may reduce, &c. 

52 That I may resolve, &c. 

53 That I may laugh, &c. 

54 That I may break, &c. 

55 That I may know, &c. 

56 That I may serve, &c. 

57 That I may follow, &c. 

58 That I may milk, &c. 

59 That I may conquer, &c. 

60 That I may be worth, &o. 

61 That I may come, &c. 

62 That I may clothe, &c. 

63 That I may live, &c. 

64 That I may see, &c. 

65 That I may be willing, &o. 

66 That I may eat, &c. 

67 That I may go forward, &c. 

68 That I may conceal, &c. 

69 That T may lead, &c. 

70 That I may call, &c. 

71 That I may throw, ko 

72 That I may try, &o. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 165 

36 mi le, moules, moule, mouiions, roouliez, rnoulent. 37 rneure, 

rneure,, ineure, mourions, mouriez, ineurent. 38 

nieuve, mouvions, mouviez, meuvent. 39'naisse 

naissions, naissiez, naissent. 40 offre, offre s, offre, -. off- 

riez, offrent. 41 ouvre, ouvres, ouvre, onvrions, ouvri 

rent. 42 paisse, paisses, paisse, paissions, j 

43 peigne, peignes, peigne, peignions, peigniez, | 

44 plaise, plaises, plaise, plaisions, plaisiez, plaisent. 45 
puisse, puisses, puisse, puissions, puissiez, puissent. 46 | 
voie, pourvoies, pourvoie, pourvoyions, pourvoyiez, 

47 premie, prennes, premie, prenions, preniez, prennent, 

48 predise, predises, predise, precisions, pr&lisiez, | t 

49 prevale, prevales, prevale, prevalions, prevaliez. | 

50 prevoie, prevoies, prevoie, prevoyions, pr6voyiez, prlvoient. 

51 reduisc, reduises, re'duise, reduisions, rgduisiez, r 

52 resolve, resolves, resolve, re'solvions, resolviez, r 

53 rie, ries, rie, riions, riiez, rient. 54 rompe, 
rompe, roinpions, rompiez, rompent. 55 
sache, sachions, sachiez, sachent. 56 serve, s< 
vions, serviez, servent. 57 suive, suives, suive, Mil 
suivent. 58 traie, traies, traie, trayions, trayiez, trai 

59 vainque, vainques, vainque, vainquions, vainquiez, rainqi] 

60 vaille, vailles, vaille, valions, valiez, vaillent. 61 
viennes, vienne, venions, veniez, viennent, 62 
vetions, vetiez, vetent. 63 vive, vives, rive, rivioi 
vent. 64 voie, voies, voie, voyions. voyiez, voient, 
veuilles, veuille, voulions, vouliez, veuilleut. 66 mai 
mange, mangions, mangiez, mangent. 67 avanc 
avance, avancions, avanciez, avanoent. 

lions, celiez, celent. "69 mine, mfenes, nrfne, meni 
menent. 70 appelle, appelies, appelle, appeli 
pellent. 71 jette, jettes, jette, jetioM, jetii 
essaies, essaie, essayions, essayiez, essaient. 



166 ELEMENTARY 

Subjunctive Mood, Imperfect or Past Tense. 

1 That I might have, that thou mightst have, that he might 
have, that we might have, that you might have, that they mio-hi 
have. 

2 That I might be, &c. 

3 That I might give, &c. 

4 That I might punish, &c. 

5 That I might owe, &c. 

6 That I might receive, &c. 

7 That I might sell, &c. 

8 That I might acquire, &c. 

9 That I might go, &c. 

10 That I might assail, &c. 

11 That I might beat, &c. 

12 That I might boil, &c. 

13 That I might drink, &c. 

14 That I might conclude, &e. 

15 That I might pickle, &c. 

16 That I might know, &c. 

17 That I might sew, &c. 

18 That I might run, &c. 

19 That I might fear, &c. 

20 That I might believe, &e. 

21 That I might grow, &c. 

22 That I might gather, &c. 

23 That I might say, &c. 

24 That I might sleep, &c. 

25 That I might write, &c. 

26 That I might send, &c. 

27 That I might do or make &c. 

28 That I might flee, &o. 

29 That I might hate, &c. 



FRENCH EXERCI- 

Tn i pa /fa it d i Su bjo 

Terminations, sse, sses, t (silent,) ssion.s. 

1 Que j'eusse, que tu eusses, qu'il eilt, que n< 
vous eussiez, qu'ils eussent. 

N. B. In the following verbs the conjunction and the pronoun- 
omitted, for the sake of brevity, but in writing or reciting the 
pupil must supply them, as in the preceding model : 

2 Fusse, fusses, fut, fussions, fussiez, fussent. 3 d 
donnasses, donnat, donnassions, donnassiez, donnassent 
nisse, punisses, punit, punissions, puni 

dusses, dut, dussions, dussiez, dussent. ( i 

recut, recessions, recussiez, recussent. 7 vendisfl 

vendit, vendissions, vendissiez, vendissent. 8 acqi 

ses, acquit, acquissions, acquissiez, acquissent. 9 alias* . 

$es, allat, allassions, allassiez, all assent. 10 I 

lisses, assaillit, assaillissions, assaillissiez, nt. 1 1 

tisse, battisses, battit, battissions, batti 

illisse, bouillisses, bouillit, bouillissions, bouilli 

13 busse, busses, but, bussions, bussiez, buSsent. 1 1 

conclusses, concliit, conclussions, conclussiez, ooi 

fisse, confisses, confit, confissions, oonfi 

nusse, connusses, connut, connussions, conni; 

17 cousisse, cousisses, cousit, coi 

18 courusse, courusses, courut, courufi 
rent. 19 craignisse, craignisses, erai 
nissiez, craignissent. 20 erusse, orua 
siez, crussent. 21 crusse, c 
crussent. 22 cueillisse, oueillisse 
lissiez, cueillissent. 23 disse, disses, dtt, 
sent. 24 dormisse, dormisses, dormlt, d< rn 
dormissent. 25 gcrivisse, fori 

siez, ecriviss,ent. 26 env 

sions, envoyassiez, envoyassent. 2 

siez, fissent. 28 fuisse, ftiisa 

29 haisse, haTsses,hait, ha'frsions, I 



168 ELEMENTARY 

30 That I might join, &c. 

31 That I might read, &c. 

32 Wanting. 

33 That I might curse, &c. 

34 That I might lie, &c. 

35 That I might put, &e. 

36 That I might grind, &c. 

37 That I might die, &c. 

38 That I might move, &c. 

39 That I might be born, &c. 

40 That I might offer, &o. 

41 That I might open, &c. 

42 Wanting, 

43 That I might paint, &c. 

44 That I might please, &c. 

45 That I might be able, &o, 

46 That I might provide, &o. 

47 That I might take, &c. 

48 That I might foretell, &c. 

49 That I might prevail, &c. 

50 That I might foresee, &o. 

51 That I might reduce, &c. 

52 That I might resolve, &,c. 

53 That I might laugh, &c, 

54 That I might break, &c. 

55 That I might know, &c. 

56 That I might serve, &c. 

57 That I might follow, &c. 

58 Wanting. 

59 That 1 might conquer, &o. 

60 That I might be worth, &o. 

61 That I might come, &c. 

62 That I might clothe, &c. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 

80 jc-ignisse, joignisses, joignit, joignissions, j« ■".. 
sent. 31 lusse, lusses, lut, lussions, lnssiez, lug 
ing. 23 maudisse, maudisses, maud it, mai 
maudissent. 34 rnentisse, mentisses, menut, i. 
tissiez, mentissent. 35 misse, misses, mit, n 
missent. 36 moulusse, moulusses, moulut, monl 
siez, rnoulussent. 37 mourusse,inourusses, mourut. i 
mourussiez, mourussent. 38 musse, musses, mut, mi 
siez, nmssent. 39 naquisse, naquisses, naquit, naq 
quissiez, naquissent. 40 ofirisse, offrisses, offril 
rissiez, offrissent. 41 ouvrisse, ouvrisses, ouvrit. 
ouvrissiez, ouvrissent. 42 wanting. 4o peigi 
peignit, peignissions, peignissiez, peignissent. 4 J plusse, plu 
plut, plussions, plussiez, plusseut. 45 pusso, puss 
sions, pussiez, pussent. 46 pourvusse, poun 
pourvussions, pourvussiez, pourvusseut. 47 pri 
prissions, prissiez, prissent. 48 predisse, pr£di 
dissions, prcdissiez. predissent. 49 prevalusse, prSvaliu 
valut, prevalussions, prevalussiez, prevalusseot. 
previsses, previt, previssions, previssiez, previ i lui- 

sisse, reduisisses, reduisit, reduisissions, redi 
sent. 52 resolusse, resolusses, resolut, resolu 
resolussent. 53 risse, risses, rit, rissioiu 
pisse, rompisses, rompit, rompissioDSj rompu 
55 susse, susses, sut, sussions, sussi 
servisses, servit, servissions, servi 
' suivisses, suivit, suivissions, suivia 
59 vainquisse, vainquisses, vainquit, vainq • vainquil 

vainquissent. 60 valusse, valusses, valut, rail 
valussent. 61 vinsse, vius.ses, vmt, vi 
62 vetisse, vetisses, vetit, vetiflsionSj ?8ti at 

15 



170 ELEMENTARY 

63 That I might live, &o. 

64 That I might see, &c. 

65 That I might be willing, &c. 

66 That I might eat, &c. 

67 That I might go forward, &c. 

68 That I might conceal, &c. 

69 That I might lead, &c. 

70 That I might call, &c. 

71 That I might throw, &c. 

72 That I might try, &c. 



The Defective Yerb to fail* 

Inf.* pres. To fail. Pres. part, failing. Past part, failed. 
Ind. pret. I failed, thou failedst, he failejl. 

We failed, you failed, they failed 



To blow, to open, (as a flower,) 



Inf. pres. To blow. 
Ind. pres. It blows, 

" pret. It will blow, 
Cond. It would blow, 
Sub. pres. That it may blow, 



Past part, blown. 

they blow, 
they will blow, 
they would blow. 



that they may blow. 



To Fry. 



Inf. pres. 


To IV v. 


Past part. 


fried. 


Ind. pres. 


I fry, 


thou friest, 


he fries. 


« fut. 


I shall fry, 


thou wilt fry, 


he will fry. 




We shall fry, 


you will fry, 


they will fry. 


Cond. pres. 


I would fry, 


thou wouldst fry, 


he would fry. 




We would fry, 


you would fry, 


they would fry 


Imperative, 


Fry thou. 







FRENCH EXERCISES. 



171 



63 vecusse, vecusses, vecut, vecussions, 

64 visse, visses, vit, vissions, vissiez, vissent. . , u- 
lusses, voulut, voulussions, voulussiez, voulussent 66 man- 
geasse, rnangeasses, mangeat, mangeassions, n mao- 
geassent. 67 avancasse, avancasses, avancat, avan<; 

cassiez, avaneassent. 68 ceiasse, classes, eclat, c 

lassiez, ctlassent. 69 nienasse, luenasses, menat, mei 

nienassiez, inenassent. 70 appelasse, appel 

lassions, appelassiez, appelassent. 71 jetasse, jetasi 

tassions, jetassiez, jetassent. 72 .-, essayafl yln^ 

essayassions, essayassiez, essayassent. 

Fa Mir. 
Faillir. faillant, fiullL 

Je faillis, tu faillis, il faillit. 

Nous faillimes, vous faillites, ila faillirent 



Eclore. 



Eclore. 
II eclot, 
II cclora, 
II eclorait, 
Qu'il eclose, 

Frire. 
Je fris, 
Je frirai, 
Nous frirons, 
Je frirais, 
Nous fririons, 
Fris. 



Frire, 

tu fris, 
tu trims, 
vous frirez, 
tu frirais, 
vous fririez, 



Eolos. 

ils iclusont. 
llfl eoloront. 

qu'ilfl < oloeent. 

Frit 
il frit. 
il frira. 

l'rir.'iit. 
il fril 



This verb, {defective) is only need in ,,:iie * 

and ii all the compound 

To supply the persona and I 
'erent tenses of Faire, to m 
uous faisons frire, vousf ■ Us font J 



172 ELEMENTARY 



EASY NAKUATIVES. 

N. B. There is so much difference between the idioms of the English 
and French languages, that it is almost impossible for beginners to make 
really good translations into French. A few literal translations from 
the French are therefore added, to be re-translated into that language. 
Grammatical accuracy, merely, will be necessary to make them good 
French. The pupil will be obliged to use a French Dictionary in trans- 
lating the following anecdotes and narratives. 

A poor man, who was a porter at Milan, found a bag in which 
there were two hundred crowns. J He who had lost it, informed 
by a public advertisement, came to the boarding house where the 
porter worked, and having given good proofs that the bag be- 
longed to him, the porter returned it to him. Full of joy and 
gratitude, he offered to his benefactor twenty crowns, which the 
latter absolutely 1 refused. He came down 2 then to ten, then to 
five. But finding him always inexorable, " I have lost nothing," 
said he, in a tone of anger, throwing down 3 his bag ; " I have lost 
nothing, if you will not receive anything." The porter accepted 
five crowns, which he immediately 1 gave to the poor. 

'See remark on Adverbs, page 108. 2 Came down from se reduire. 
8 Down, par terre. 



One day when (que) the dauphin, the father of Louis the Six- 
teenth, was hunting with the king in the environs of Compiegne, 
his coachman wished to cross a piece of ground, where the harvest 
had not been got in. 1 Having perceived it, he called 2 to him to 
go back 3 into the road./. The coachman remarked to him, that he 
would not arrive in (a) time at the place of meeting. 4 " iJe it 
so," replied the prince ; " I would rather 5 miss ten appointments 4 
than occasion injury to the field of a poor countryman." 

1 Where the harvest, &c, write, of which the crop was noV ^et 
harvested {levee,) 9 Callsd from crier. 3 Go back, rentrer. A Jtendcz-' hs. 
1 Would rather, from am ir mieux. 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 173 

Alphonso, king of Aragon, was riding one day on hi 
A page, who was walking before him, wounded him t] 
lessness, by pulling the branch of a tree, which .struck him id (a) 
the eye, and made the blood gush out. This acoidenl 
frightened all the lords of his suite, who instantly 1 i. 
drew near 2 him. The king, notwithstanding the pain that 
cheered them, and then 1 said to them quietly : •• Whal _ 
the most concern, 4 is the sorrow of this poor page, who Lfl the 
cause of my wound. " 

^ee remark on Adverbs, page 106. "Drew near, from de 

8 With a tranquil air. 4 peine. 



A wounded soldier having been forgotten on the field of battle, 
one only friend, his companion, his dog, had remain* 
Incgnsolable, without food, he had passed t\. 
master's body, resolved not to survive him (////.) 
perceived (coinj). pres) some slight movement. Tl 
cherished master opened again 2 to the light, lie breath tfl He 
still lives ! The generous animal covers him with (</' ) 
he licks his wounds, he warms his icy-cold 1 limbs. The sol 
lifts himself up 4 , but, exhausted by his Ion 
powerless 5 ; he will die of weakness. Where can he 
assistance? Where find succour? On all Bides sil< 
death ! .'.But what (que) can not instinct directed 1 
plish ? Mwith an eager scent", the dog question 
bounding with (de) joy, lie sets oil" like an ai 
more quickly, and brings to his faintin. 
which he has discovered in the midst of the 



l aupres de. "opened again, comp. p rauvrir. 

p one's self, se soulc^r. '"sans Jo 



' • l/~ - 1 ..... 1 i,llTi 

up I 



171 ELEMENTARY 

/ The reply which the famous Cornelia, mother of the Gracchi 1 , made 
to a lady of Campania 2 , is very celebrated. ^This lady, who was very 
rich, and still mori haughty, after having 3 displayed before the eyes 
of Cornelia^in a visit that she made 4 to her, her diamonds, pearls, 
and most precious jewels^begged her earnestly 5 to show her hers 
also. § Cornelia dexterously turned 6 the conversation upon an other 
subject 7 until the return of her "sons, who had gone to the public 
schools/^ When they returned 8 , and 9 entered into their mother's room : 
**} "Behold," said she to the lady of Campania, showing them to her, 
"behold my jewels and my ornaments*" 

/ 

1 Gr acqucs. 2 of Campania, Campanienne. 3 Infin. mood. 4 from rendre. 
6 avec instance. *fittomber. 7 mature, f. 8 Comp. Pret. 9 After and, supply 
that they. 



THE TULIP AND THE ROSE. 

A tulip and a rose were neighbors in the same garden. They 
were both exceedingly beautiful; yet the gardener paid 1 most care 
and most attention to 1 the rose. The tulip, vain of her exterior 
charms, and not being able to bear the thought of being abandoned 
for another, reproached 2 the gardener with his partiality. "Why is 
my beauty thus neglected?" she asked him. "Are not my colors 
more brilliant, more variegated, and more attractive, 3 than those of 
the rose? Why then do you prefer her to me, and bestow 4 on her 
all your affection?" "Do not be discontented, beautiful tulip," 
answered the gardener; "I know your beauties, and I admire them 
as they deserve (it,) but there are in my favorite rose odors and in- 
ternal charms, which beauty alone cannot afford 5 me." 

Externalbeauty strikes at first sight 6 , but we should prefer internal 
merit. 

x paid ... to, from avoir . . .pour. 2 reproaclied to the gardener his 
&c. z engageantcs. 4 from donncr. 5 procurer. 6 at first sight, d\ibord 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 
MAHMOUDj KHAN OF TART All Y. 

A poor woman complained to Mahinoud, Khan of T 
conquered Persia in the tenth century, against [dt ) a person who had 
murdered her only son in the province of Yrac, in Persia. u i 
would you have one do 2 justice at such a distance?" said M 
''Why did you conquer countries, which you cannot govern at 
a distance?" replied the unfortunate mother. 

x Khan of Tartary, Kan des Tartans. 2 How would you I a do? 

Comment voulez-vous qu'on fasse ? 



LA FONTAINE. 



Of 1 the works of this author nothing can be recomim 
his fables. In these 3 he has surpassed every other wri 
name of the Inimitable La Fontaine has been given tiim 
consent. 4 His fables are perfectly natural, without the least afl 
tion, and replete with 5 wit. He was a man of extreme Bimj 
manners; full of candor and probity; but in 
and thoughtful, so much so 7 , that he often B] 
without knowing them. 

x of, parmi. 2 Write, one can recommend only, 
that. 4 by common consent, d'un commun 
de. * Write, he had always the mind absent. 



SWISS ANBOl 



•An inhabitant of the canton of Schwita came one 
neighbor Gaspard, who was working in I 
"My friend, thou knowest thai 
of ground: I have applied to the jud 
is sufficiently learned 2 to know which of 
must both appear before him to-mor* 



176 ELEMENTARY 

Gaspard, "thou seest that I have mowed the whole of the meadow; 

I must get in 4 the hay to-morrow; I cannot go." '/*< What is to be 
done 5 ?' 7 resumed the other, "how can I disappoint 6 the judge, who 
has fixed upon 7 to-morrow to (pour) decide on (de) the affair? i Be- 
sides, I think it necessary to know to whom the ground belongs before 8 
gathering (Inf. Mood) the crop."? They had thus disputed for some 
time, when Gaspard seized the hand of Frantz, and exclaimed J" I'll 
tell thee what 9 , my friend : go to Schwitz alone, explain to the judge 
thy reasons and mine ; argue on both sides 10 ; why should I go thither 
myself?" "Agreed 11 ," said Frantz; "since thou trustest me with 
the management 12 of this business, depend upon it 13 I shall act for 
the best." 14 

The affair being thus settled, Frantz set off next day for the town, 
explained his reasons, and argued pro and con 15 with (de) all his 
might. As soon as the verdict 16 was given 17 , he hastened 13 to (de) re- 
turn to his neighbor. " I congratulate thee, friend Gaspard," cried 
he, as soon as he perceived him, ^the meadow is thine 19 , and Iain 
glad that this business is°° finished." From 21 that day, (says the 
Swiss Chronicle, from which 22 this anecdote is extracted, 23 J) the two 
peasants lived in perfect friendship. 

x to be at variance about, avoir un differ end pour. 2 learned, instruits. 
s see appendix, page 144. 1 to get in, ramasser. 5 Write, what is it necessary 
to do? 6 disappoint, manquer de parole a. 7 fixed upon, choisi, 8 before, a vaat 
de. 9 I'll tell thee what, Je vais te dire ce qu'il y a. 1(J Write, the two sides. 

II Agreed, ainsi conclu. u conduit c,f. 13 Write, be assured. H for the best, 
de mon mieux. 15 pro and con, pour et contre. 1Q jugement } m. 1? prononce. 
18 hastened, from se hater. 10 is thine, t Vapparticnt. 20 See Remark on the 
subjunctive mood, page 142. 21 Depuis. 21 from which, d'ou. 23 to extract, 
tirer. 



THE ACORN AND THE PUMPKIN. 

/ A villager, contemplating the size 1 of the pumpkin and the smnll- 
ness of its stem, 2 exclaimed iiJ ( Of (a) what was the Author of Na- 
ture thinking 3 , when he made 4 that plant? Its stem is so little 
proportioned to its size, that it cannot support it, and its fruit is 
obliged to lie on the ground and spoil.''' *That fruit would have Uvu 



FRENCH EXERCISES. 177 

better placed on this oak : it is a large, strong tree. An 
does not the acorn, which is not bigger than my littl 
on a small stem?" 

These reflections embarrassed him greatly.' In the mean 
lies down 7 at the foot of an oak to take a little nap : but he 
sleep. The wind was strong; it blew down 8 Bom< 
on the nose of our critic; the blood gushed out. 10 "Oh! 
he, changing his tune/ 1 "I see now that God has mad 
he has made. If these acorns had been pumpkins, they would I 
broken my head 13 /' So he returned home, praising God fur 
every thing. 

1 grosseur, f. 2 Write, how much its stem is small. 3 was think 
songer. 4 when he made, write, in making. 6 t<> 
7 to lie down, se coucher. 8 to blow clown, abattre. 
un. 10 to gush out. sortir. n his tune, de tangage. lL> bun. - V, 
would have broken to me the head. 



THE YOUNG FLY. 



A young fly was with her mother on a chimney wall, 1 quit 
a pot, in which 3 soup was boiling. 

The old fly who had business elsewhere, said to her daugl 
flying away : . '" Stay where thou art, my child ; do not l< 
place^ until my return." fWhy, mamma?" Baked I 
"Because lam afraid that thou wilt go 5 i thatboilinj 

It is the pot that she called by that name- 1 "And why m 
go near 7 it?" "Because thou wouldst fall in, s and 1 
it." 9 "And why would I fall into it?" 10 u I 
reason; but trust to 11 my experience. Every time 
taken it into her head 1 -' to fly over one of th< 
so many vapors rise, I I have always Been thai she B U fa 
ever rising from it again." J 
/ The mother thought she had said 11 enough, an 
the little one laughing at 17 her advice, said to 
pie are always too careful. Why wiah to deprii 



178 ELEMENTARY 

cent pleasure of fluttering a little over this smoking spring?^/ Have 
I not wings, and am I not prudent enough to avoid accidents? In 
short, mamma, it is in vain for you to talk, 18 and to allege your ex- 
perience to me, I will amuse myself in fluttering 19 a little around 
the spring} and I should like 20 to know what would make me go 
down 21 into it." 22 

So saying 23 she flies off; but she was scarcely over 24 the pot, when, 
made giddy 25 by the eteam which was rising from it, she fell in. 26 
Before expiring, 27 she still had time to utter these words : " Unhappy 
are the children who do not listen to 2S the advice of their parents!" 



Mhe wall of a chimney. 2 quite, assez. 3 in which, oil. 4 on, en. 5 wilt 
go, subj. pres. of s 1 approclier . 6 by that name, ainsi. 7 to go near, s^ap- 
procher. 8 in, dedans. 9 be drowned in it, Vy noyerais. 10 into it, y. n trust 
from, croire; to, en. 12 to take it into one's head, s^aviser. 13 from which, 
d'ou. 14 to rise, s*exhaler. 15 to rise again, remonter. ls she had said; 
write, to have said. 17 to laugh at, se moquer de. 18 it is in vain for you 
to talk, vous avez beau dire. 19 Write, to flutter. 20 should like, voudrais 
bien. 21 go down, descendre. 22 into it, y. 23 Write, in saying that. 24 over, 
au dessus de. 25 made giddy, etourdie. 26 fell in, s '2/ laissa tomber. 21 Avant 
d'expirer. 28 to listen to, ecouter. 



THE ABENAKI. 

/ During one of the wars in America, a company of Abcnakis 1 (a 
tribe of Indians,) defeated a small body 2 of British 3 troops. The 
vanquished could not escape from (a) enemies more nimble than they 
in running 4 , and eager 5 to pursue them. 

A young English officer, chased 6 by two savages, who came up 7 to 
him with raised battle-axes 8 , had no hope of escaping 9 from death. 
| At the same time, an old Indian, armed with (de) a bow,<- approaches 
him and prepares to pierce him with (de) an arrow; but after having 
taken aim at 10 him, he lowers his bow suddenly." and runs to throw 
himself between the young officer and the two barbarians, who were 
going to massacre hiin. The latter retired with respect. K 

The old man took the Englishman by the hand, encouragfed 11 him 



VREXCH EXERCISER IT'.I 

by his caresses, and conducted him to bis cabin, Where h 

hirn with a kindness which never varied. 

him (of him) less his slave than his companion] he taught 

him) the language of the Abenakis, and the rode 

(chez) these people. - They lived very happily together*, One tl 

only gave uneasiness to the officer; sometimes the old man 

fix 14 his (the) eyes upon him, and after having looked at 1 * him he 

dropped (let fall) some tears. :7.' 

On (a) the return of spring, the savages resumed their (the) in 
and took the field 16 . The old man, who was still sufficiently n 
to bear the fatigues of war, set out with them, accompanied by 
his prisoner. The Abenakis marched more than 
leagues through (a travers) the forests; at last, they arri 
plain where they discovered a British encampment 17 . 
showed 18 it to his prisoner, watching (in < 
\ " There are thy brothers," said he to him; " there are 
who are awaiung us to give us battle. Listen: I ha thy 

life 19 , I have taught thee to make a canoe, a bow ai 
handle the battle-axe, and to surprise the beaver in the I 
wast thou, when I led thee to (dans) my hutrfKrii; 
those of a child; they served neither to procure tl 
fend thee. Thou knewest nothing. Thou ov. 
Wilt thou unite thyself to thy brothers, and lift Uj 
against us?" 

The Englishman declared that he would rather [would Kh 
to) lose his (the) life a thousand times, than died the bk 
deliverer. 

The Abenaki covered 20 his face with both hifl hands, bending down 81 
nis (the) head; and after having {Inf. Mood) been Bome time in 
attitude, he looked at the young Englishman: and said 
(de) a tone of mingled 22 tenderness and griefs * I ! 
"My father/' said the young man, "waa living, when I 
country." mias!" cries the Indian, "how 
and after a moment of silenc 

been a father! I am < &«*•) ! 

in battle 25 ;" he was at my side; he was covered with 



180 FRENCH EXERCISES. 

he fell 23 . Bat I have avenged him!" / He pronounced these words 
with vehemence, (force.) All his body trembled.^ He was almost 
stifled with (par) groans, which he would not suffer 26 to escape : His 
eyes were -restless 27 , his tears did not flow.^VHe became calm 28 by 
degrees 29 , and turning himself towards the east, where the sun was 
rising, he said to the young officer: ""Dost thou see that beautiful 
sky resplendent with (de) light? Hast thou any pleasure in (d) 
looking at it?" /"Yes," replied the Englishman, "I have pleasure 
in looking at that beautiful sky." .jr & I have none," said the Indian, 
in shedding a torrent of tears. Some moments after, he shows to 
the young man a magnolia in bloom 30 . "Dost thou see that beauti- 
ful tree," said he to him, "and dost thou look at it with pleasure?" 
"Yes," replied the young man, '.'I have pleasure in looking at it." 
^f-jt'X no longer have any," said the Indian hastily 31 ; and immediately 
he added : *" Depart, go back to thy father, that he may still have 
pleasure in seeing the rising 32 sun, and the flowers of the spring.". ■- . 



1 Abenakis. 2 a small body of troops, un detachement. 3 Anglais. 4 in 
running, a la course. s acharnes. *presse. 7 to come up to, aborder. 8 Write, 
the axe raised. 9 to escape from, se derober a. °to take aim aUajuster. 

11 from r assurer. 12 practised, en usage. 3 Write, much pleased with one 
another. 14 See Remark on the Imperfect, page 136. l5 to look at, re- 
garder. 6 to take the field, se mettre en campagne. ^ camp, m. 18 to 
show, faire voir. 19 Write, I to thee have saved the life. 20 Write, put 
the two hands over his face. 21 beading down, en baissant. p Write, 
mingled with (de.) 23 Comp. Present. 24 Write, how- he must be un- 
happy. 25 combat, m. 2G laisser. 21 egares. 28 to become calm, se calmer. 
29 by degrees, peu a peu. J 50 in bloom, en fleurs. 31 a-ic precipitation. 

12 YVrite, the sun which rises. 



TO HE©« 




MODEL TEXT-BOOKS. 

FOR 

SCHOOLS, ACADEMIES, AND COLLEGES, 

PUBLISHED BY 

ELDREDGE & BROTHER, 

17 & 19 SOUTH SIXTH ST., PH1LA., PA. 



CHASE & STUART'S CLASSICAL SERIES. 

EDITED BY 

THOMAS CHASE, A.M., GEORGE STUART, A.M. 

PROFESSOR OF CLASSICAL LITERATURE, & PROFESSOR OF THE LATIN LANGUAGE, 

Eaverford College, Central 11 Igh Sokooi, 

Penna. Philad*. 



R e fe rences to 

HARKNESS'S LATIN GRAMMAR, 

ANDREWS & STODDARD'S LATIN GRAMMAR, 

BULLIONS & MORRIS'S LATIN GRAMMAR, 

AND 

ALLEN'S MANUAL LATIN GRAMMAR. 

The publication of this edition of the Cla 
gested by the constantly increasing demand by te*oh< 
an edition which, by judicious notes, would give to th 
dent the assistance really necessary to render bil study | 
able, furnishing explanations of passages diffioult of in' 
tation, of peculiarities of syntax, fee., Mid J*i would i- 
him to make faithful use of his Grammar and Diotlon I 

It is believed that this Classical Seriet needl ool; 
known to insure its very general use. Tin- publifl 
for it peculiar merit, and beg leave to call a t ten t io n 
following important particulars: 

The purity of the texts. 



The clearness and conciseness of the notes, and their adap- 
tation to the wants of students. 
The beauty of the type and paper. 
The handsome style of binding. 
The convenience of the shape and size. 
The low price at which the volumes are sold. 
The preparation of the whole Series is the original work of 
American scholars. 

The texts are not mere reprints, but are based upon a careful 
and painstaking comparison of all the most improved editions , with 
constant reference to the authority of the best manuscripts. 
The Series, when complete, will consist of 
CAESAR'S COMMENTARIES. 
VIRGIL'S .ENEID. 

FIRST SIX BOOKS OF VIRGIL'S JENEID, WITH LEXi 
CON, &c. 

CICERO'S ORATIONS. 

HORACE'S ODES, SATIRES, AND EPISTLES. 
SALLTJST. 
LIVY. 

VIRGIL'S ECLOGTJES AND GEORGICS. 
Of which there are now ready the following, viz. : 

CAESAR'S COMMENTARIES, Price, . . . $1.25 
VIRGIL'S JENEID, ....... 1.50 

CICERO'S ORATIONS, 1.25 

HORACE'S ODES, SATIRES, AND EPISTLES, . 1.50 

Due notice will be given of the publication of the remaining 
volumes. The generous welcome given to these books, proves 
very conclusively that they are well adapted to the wants of 
the class-room. Already they have been adopted in every 
State in the Union, and the publishers have the proud satis- 
faction of stating that they are at this time the standard 
| text-books in nearly One Thousand Schools, an(i tne num " 
'ber is daily increasing. Among these are many of the largest 
and most important classical institutions in the country. 

Circulars containing full descriptive notices of the different 
books of the series will be sent to any address on application. 



THE CRITTENDEN COMMERCIAL ARITH- 
1 METIC AND BUSINESS MANUAL. i> 

for the use of Teachers, Business Men, Academies, High 

Schools, and Commercial Colleges. By Jujin (.: 
Consulting Accountant, and Principal of Crittend< 
delphia Commercial College. Price by mail, post-p 

Circulars containing full descriptive notice, testim 
&c, will be sent to any address on application to tin 
lishers. 

The following review of this book, from one of the le 
educational papers of the country, well describes its char 

"We have at last found a work on Business Calculations tang 
sought for, one comprising our own views. This is a compilation 
of%he current usages of business men for performing over) 
lation of a business character. Beginning with methods of addition, 
it treats of quick and practical ways of performing all the foods 
mental rules, followed by calculations used in particular bri 
of business, percentage, interest, averaging, money, n 
measures as they are, exchange of every kind, profit and lost, tnark- 
ing goods, dividends and investments, (all about U. B. bund.-. 
10-40's, 7-30's, greenbacks, legal-tenders, ic) stocks, ('bulls,' 
'bears/ 'selling short,' ' cornering,' <fcc.,) the metrical and 
system, ending with business forms and information worth thi 
price of the book, and not obtainable elscichcre. W« OOmO 
highly, for it deserves it. It is fresh, practical, and reliable" 

In every High School and Academy in the land, the I 
ization of a class in Commercial Arithmetic, Buflin 
lations, and Forms will prove an element of popular • 
success that will yield rich results. The subject itl 
so intrinsically valuable as a means of developing th( 
that, were this the only result to be gained, it \\ ■ 
titled to and should receive the special attention of th< 
gressive teacher. But apart from this, the introduction of a 
study so interesting in itself, so attractive to the Scholai 
having so direct a bearing on bifl future welfare, will, In 
an instance, decide the welfare of I school, direeting the 
channel of popular opinion in its favor, and prOTfl the 
of filling it with students anxious to secure I (get. 



A MANUAL OF ELOCUTION. Founded upon 
the Philosophy of the Human Voice, with 
Classified Illustrations, Suggested by and 
Arranged to meet the Practical Difficulties 
of Instruction. By. M. S. Mitchell. Price 
by mail, post-paid, $1.50. 

The compiler cannot conceal the hope that this glimpse of 
our general literature may tempt to individual research among 
its treasures, so varied and inexhaustible; — that this text- 
book for the school-room may become not only teacher, but 
friend, to those in whose hands it is placed, and while aiding, 
through systematic development and training of the elocu- 
tionary powers of the pupil, to overcome many of the prac- 
tical difficulties of instruction, may accomplish a higher work 
in the cultivation and refinement of character. 

SUBJECTS TREATED OF. 

Articulation, Pronunciation, Accent, Emphasis, Modula- 
tion, Melody of Speech, Pitch, Tone, Inflections, Sense, Ca- 
dence, Force, Stress, Grammatical and Rhetorical Pauses. 
Movement, Reading of Poetry, Action, Attitude, Analysis of 
the Principles of Gestures, and Oratory. 

Among the gems of literature collected in this volume may 
be named the following, which will give a general idea of the 
character of the selections for practice, of which the volume 
is largely composed. 



A Psalm of Life. 

Address at Gettysburg. 

Barbara Frietchie. 

Bonny Kelmeny. 

Bugle Song. 

Charge of the Light Brigade. 

Death of Little Nell. 

Dies Irae. 

Elegy in a Country Churchyard. 

Excelsior. 

Godiva. 

Invocation to Light. 

Laus Deo. 

The American Flag. 



Oh ! why should the Spirit of 
Mortal be Proud ? 

The Battle of Ivry. 

The Bells. 

The Bridge of Sighs. 

The Great Bell Roland. 

The Mantle of St. John de Ha- 
tha. 

The Raven. 

The Soldier from Bingen. 

The Song of the Shirt. 

Union and Liberty. 

Woman's Education. 

Work. 



J 



THE MODEL DEFINER, with Sentence* aho* 

ing the Proper Use of Words, An Elemen- 
tary Work, containing Definitions and 
mology for the Little Ones. By A. ( '. AV 
Price by mail, post-paid, 25 cents. 



JHE 



MODEL ETYMOLOGY. Giving not only 

the Definitions, Etymology, and Ana; 
but that which can be obtained only from an 
intimate acquaintance with the best Authors, 

viz.: The Correct Use of Words. By. A. ( 

Webb. Price by mail, post-paid, GO cent 



JHE 



YOUNG STUDENT'S COMPANION; or, 

Elementary Lessons and Exorcises in Tn 
lating from English into French. By M. A. 
Longstreth, Principal of a Seminary 
Young Ladies, Philadelphia. Price by mail, 
post-paid, S1.00. 



MARTINDALE'S HISTORY OF THE UNITED 
STATES. From the Discovery <>f A,m< 

to the close of the late Rebellion. By .J"-i ph 
C. Martindale, M. D., Principal of the Ka . 

ison Grammar School, Philadelphia I 
by mail, post-paid. GO cents. 



IN THE SCHOOL-ROOM ; or, Chapters in the 
* Philosophy of Education. By John S. Hart, 
LL.D., Principal of New Jersey State Normal 
School. Price by mail, post-paid, $1.25. This 
work gives the results of the experience and 
observation of the author " In the School- 
Room" for a period of years extending over 
more than one-third of a century. 

NO TEACHER CAN AFFORD TO BE WITHOUT IT. 
IT IS A TEACHER'S LIBRARY IN A SINGLE BOOK. 

THE MODEL POCKET REGISTER & GRADE- 
BOOK. -A- Roll-Book, Eegister, and Eecord 
combined. Adapted to any Grade of School, 
from Primary to College. Handsomely and 
durably bound in fine Cloth. Price by mail, 
post-paid, 65 cents. 

MODEL SCHOOL-DIARY. Designed as 
an aid in securing the co-operation of parents. 
It consists of a Eecord of the Attendance, 
Deportment, Eecitations, &c, of a Scholar, 
for every day in the week. At the close of 
the week it is to be sent to the parent or 
guardian, for his examination and signature. 
Teachers will find in this Diary an article 
that has long been needed. Its low cost will 
insure its general use. Copies will be mailed 
to teachers for examination, post-paid, on re- 
ceipt of ten cents. Price per dozen, by mail, 
post-paid, $1.00. 



JHE 






■ 



* 



■ 



M 

k *;..'^ 



■ 



